division 15 mechanical ibs plumb

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY ODAC

Division (15) Mechanical work

1 Al LABINA / AL MANAR

in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV

DIVISION 15: MECHANICAL

A. PLUMBING AND FIRE FIGHTING

Section 15010: Basic Requirements For Plumbing And Fire Fighting.

Section 15030: Electrical Requirements For Plumbing And Fire Fighting

Section 15040: Builders Work For Plumbing And Fir Fighting

Section 15060: Pipes And Pipe Fittings

Section 15100: Valves

Section 15120: Piping Specialties

Section 15135: Meters And Gauges

Section 15145: Hangers And Supports

Section 15190: Mechanical Identification

Section 15300: Fire Protection

Section 15311: FM 200 System

Section 15410: Plumbing Piping

Section 15411: Water Distribution System

Section 15412: Soil And Waste System

Section 15413: Storm Water System

Section 15440:

Section 15444:

Section 15445:

Section 15446:

Section 15450:

Plumbing Fixturers

Packaged booster pump

Sewage pumps

Sump pumps

Potable – water storage tanks

Section 15460:

Section 15471:

Water Heaters

Water filteration equipment

Section 15960 : Preamble and Definitions

Section 15965 : General Conditions

Section 15970 : Pump Room

Section 15973 : Alarm Devices

Section 15974 : Sprinklers

Section 15975 : System Accessories

Section 15976 : Hydrant System

Section 15977 : Pipes

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY ODAC Division (15) Mechanical work Section 15960



Division 15- Mechanical work

Section 15960 - Preamble & Definitions Part 1 - General 1 01 Related Documents

A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including general and special conditions and Division-1 (General requirements), apply to work of this section.

B. General Provisions for fire fighting works, Section 15960, applies to work of this section.

C. It’s the Contractor responsibility to be fully aware of and comply with all of the requirements of

the above. 1 02 Works Description

A. The requirements of the contract documents, including the general conditions and special conditions and general requirements apply to the work of this division.

B. In case of conflict between these requirements and the general requirements of Division 1, refer

the issue to engineer for directions. C. Drawings are diagrammatic and are a graphic representation of contract requirements to the

best available standards at the scale required. D. Fire fighting riser diagrams and schematic diagrams generally indicate equipment connections

to be used. Provide all works shown on diagrams whether or not it is duplicated on the plans. E. Specifications include incomplete sentences. Words or phrases such as "the contractor shall,"

"shall be," "furnish," "provide," "a," "an," "the," and "all" have been omitted for brevity. F. Except where modified by a specific notation to the contrary, the indication and/or description of

any item, in the drawings of specifications or both, carries with it the instruction to furnish and install the item complete with all appurtenances or accessories necessary to complete any required system, regardless of whether or not this instruction is explicitly stated as part of the indication or description.

G. Specifications, bill of quantities and drawings are complimentary and are to be taken together

for a complete interpretation of works.

H. Drawings of necessity utilize symbols and schematic diagrams to indicate various items of work. Neither of these have any dimensional significance nor do they delineate every item required for the intended installation.

Install the work in accordance with the diagrammatic intent expressed on the fire fighting and mechanical drawings, and in conformity with the dimensions indicated on final architectural and structural working drawings and on equipment shop drawings.

I. Certain details appear on the drawings, which are specific with regard to the dimensioning and

positioning of the work. These details are intended only for the purpose of establishing general feasibility. They do not obviate field coordination for the indicated work.




J. Derive information as to the general construction from structural and architectural drawings and specifications.

K. Where a discrepancy exists between the drawings and / or other parts of the contractor

documents or where the interpretation of either is in doubt, the contractor shall obtain written clarification from the owner's authorized representative on such matters before beginning the work.

1 03 Preparation of Contractor 'S Drawings

A. The contractor's drawings shall be prepared by staff experienced in such works and the contractor shall submit for consultant review and approval evidence of the suitability and number of his staff who will undertake these tasks.

B. The construction drawings indicate the approximate position of equipment, etc., and the

contractor shall allow for any minor modifications to location that may be necessary. 1 04 Commissioning And Performance Testing

A. Should the Contractor propose that the commissioning and performance testing be carried out

by a specialist firm, full details of the capability and experience of such firm shall be submitted to the consultant for review and approval

1 05 Conditions Relating To Suppliers

A. Submit a detailed list of manufacturers' names and addresses for materials and equipment

proposed for the Work. B. Once accepted by the consultant materials and equipments shall not be purchased from other

sources without the prior written agreement of the consultant.

1 06 System Maintenance Contract

The contractor shall submit a supplementary proposal for an annual system maintenance contract under which the contractor would undertake, is addition to his obligations under this contract, to fully maintain the system in efficient working order, including routing checks, adjustments, lubrication and replacement of consumable spares, etc.,

The proposal shall set out the terms of the offer, the work to be carried out, the guarantees of performance, the inclusive price for the twelve months following practical completion, and terms under which annual maintenance may be carried out thereafter.




PART 2 : DEFINITIONS 2.1 General Definitions And Abbreviations

A. The following initials, words and phrases shall have the following meanings:

DIN - German Standard Institute. BS - British Standards. EN - European Standards. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association. UL - Underwriters Laboratories. FM - Factory Mutual. ANSI - American National Standard Institute. "The work" - That part of the project dependent upon or subsequent to the

statement. "The works" - The works referred to in the Specification and which are fully shown

and described in the Contract Documents. "Directed" - Directed by the Owner's authorized representative "Inspected" - Inspected by consultant. “Submitted” or submit - Submitted to or submit to the Owner's authorized representative "Specification" - The description of performance requirements, materials and

workmanship contained in the Contract Documentation. 2.2 Definition Of "Agreement", Acceptance" And "Approval"

"Agreement" - Acceptance" and "Approval" shall have the following meanings: "Agreed" or - Agreed by or agreement of the consultant in writing "Agreement"

"Accepted" or - Accepted or acceptance by the consultant in writing "Acceptance" "Approved" or - Approved by or approval of the consultant in writing "Approval" "Agreement", "Acceptance" or "Approval" by or of the consultant shall have the following limitation:

A. When given in respect to samples of materials, workmanship or methods of construction submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents shall not be construed as denoting any degree of satisfaction with the materials used in, or the execution of the Works.

B. When given in respect of drawings, documents or schemes called for by the contract

Documents or proposed by the Contractor, is only for conformance with the design intent and information given in the Contract Documents or contained in subsequent Instructions.

C. When given in respect to the methods of keeping records shall mean those methods are

satisfactory.




Part 3: Installation 3 01 Installation

This requisition covers the supply and installation of fire protection equipment and materials which will be executed by a local contractor to install and erect.

This document is only related to the following main items: - Main electric fire pump + stand by electric fire pump + Jockey pump - Pipe network - External Hydrant system - Internal Hose system - Sprinkler system - CO² Cylinder system

It is recommended that: - All equipments and materials shall be brought together by one supplier. - This requisition should be read in conjunction with all other terms and conditions as

stipulated by the owner.

3 02 Approved Material: Designated material, apparatus and methods of installing material and apparatus which are approved and listed in the Factory Mutual (FM) Approval Guide, and /or by the Underwriters Laboratories (UL) .or equal approved systems

3 03 Approved Equal:

Refers to materials or products, either as a unit component or a complete unit assembly of a make (brand name or other proprietary designation) other than those approved/listed by FM/UL or equal approved systems and of a size, composition, grade or quality equal to those materials of products which subject to the consultant approval, as a substitute for the materials or products approved / listed by FM/UL. or equal approved systems




Division 15- Mechanical Work Section 15965 - General Conditions

Part 1: Scope of Work

It is required to supply, erect; test and commission of fire pump station, main loop, and external hydrant system and internal hose system. The work includes - but not limited to - the supply of all material, equipment, tools and all incidents for the completion of work to the owner's satisfaction in accordance with the fire fighting system specified in the tender documents, bill of quantities & drawings.

Part 2: Examination of Site and Documents

The contractor shall visit the site and shall fully acquaint himself to the prevailing conditions during the tendering period and before submitting his offer, and shall satisfy himself of any condition which might in any way affect the work as no claim of any nature shall be allowed for lack of knowledge in this respect.

Part 3: Factory Test

For air cooled water chiller in attendance of consultant & owner representatives, no

of (4) four engineers should attend this factory test

Part 4: Expenses The contractor will bear all expenses of transportation and accommodations.

Part 5: Standard Products

Materials and equipment to be provided shall be standard catalogue products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of products, conforming to the specifications.

Part 6: Submissions

Complete and detailed information of all materials and equipment to be incorporated in the work shall be submitted to the engineer for approval. Detailed description and specification shall be submitted including catalogues, dimensions, controls, charts and any other data required to demonstrate compliance with contract documents. Each item submitted shall be referenced to the applicable paragraph in the specifications or bill of quantity.




Part 7: Submission Of Samples

At the engineer's or his representatives request, the contractor shall submit samples of any materials or equipment for further study before approval. Only approved materials and equipment shall be employed. Any equipment or materials installed without being approved shall be removed and reinstalled by approved ones at the expense of the contractor.

Part 8: Shop Drawings

The contractor shall prepare and submit for the approval of the engineer shop drawings of 1:100 scales or larger to clearly show all details, dimensions, space clearances, methods of installation and hanging or fixing to building structures ...etc. Shop drawings supported by hydraulic calculation shall be submitted for, but not limited to the following:

- Risers, check valves, flow indicator switches and electrically supervised valves

- Pipes and fittings. - Pipe sleeves, hangers, side wall supports for horizontal and vertical pipe sections. - Test and drain connections, test and flush connections and air release valves.

Part 9: Approval

- Approved material Designated material, method of installing to be approved and listed in the Factory Mutual (FM) and or Underwriter Laboratories (UL). or equal approved systems

- Approval of municipality fire brigade authority

After completion of all the work and shop drawings, the contractor shall do all required communications with the concerned fire brigade authorities for getting their approval for the equipment, drawings as well as any other documents that are deemed necessary for their approval.

Part 10: Time Schedule And Execution Program

The contractor shall submit his time schedule for the supply of materials installation program using time line or primavera.

Part 11: As Built Drawings

The contractor shall furnish and keep at all times, on the job site, one complete and separate set of blue prints of the fire protection works on which any changes, revisions and/or additions made to the fire protection works other than as shown on the contract drawings, shall be clearly, neatly and properly noted. Record drawings shall also indicate the daily progress of work by coloring in the day-to-day completed work. At the conclusion of the work, the contractor shall prepare at his expense, one set of transparent print and seven sets of as installed drawings (blue prints) to be handed to the engineer's representative.




Part 12: Operating Instructions And Maintenance Manuals

The contractor shall instruct the owner's personnel on the proper operation, servicing and maintenance of all components of the fire protection systems. He shall also furnish and forward to the engineer or his representative the following:

- Description of operating principle, engineering calculations as may be related and applicable, operation and maintenance instructions for all parts of the installed systems.

- Installation instructions for specific components such as control valves, switches, flow indicators, electrically supervised valves...etc.

- Manufacturers operation and maintenance manuals, drawings and illustrated parts lists for all equipment, instruments and apparatus used in the works.

Part 13: Guarantee

- The contractor shall guarantee that all elements of the systems are of sufficient capacity to meet the specified performance requirements as set forth herein and as indicated on the drawings.

- During the guarantee period, and upon receipt of a notice from the owner of failure of any part of the system or equipment, the affected part or parts shall be duly replaced by the contractor at no extra cost on the owner.

- Before the final payment is made, the contractor shall furnish and hand the engineer a written guarantee covering the above requirements.

Part 14: Valve Identification/Supervisor

Each valve on main or branch line of piping should have a 30 mm. diameter brass tag with a black filled engraved number and letter. Tags shall be affixed to valves by means of brass "S" shaped books. Tags on different services shall be identified by a letter and a number designation of a type to be approved by the engineer. All valves will be electrically supervised with tamper switch connected to C.P.

Part 15: Welding

- Standards, Qualifications And General Requirements All welding will be performed according to the application standards. Only qualified welders who are holding valid welding certificate will be allowed to carry out the welding work. In general, prior to performing any welding, the surfaces to be welded will be thoroughly cleaned of any oxides, layout coating, dirt, grease and any other foreign matters. Cleaning will be done mechanically no chemical cleaning is used which might affect the physical chemical or mechanical properties of the welded material or the weld cracks, pinholes, excessive under coatings and/or any welding defects shall be duly removed and the joint re-welded.

- Checking And Testing All welding shall be carried out in the contractor's work area under strict supervision. All welding shall be constantly checked by the engineer's representative and any bad or defected welds discovered during the fabrication and/or installation, work shall be




rejected and to be completely cut, reground and properly re welded. If the discovery of bad welds is repeated, the engineer or his representative shall order 10 welds to be taken randomly for X-ray testing by any approved specialized agency. The contractor shall bear all costs of X-ray testing and the re welding of the failing welds.

Part 16: Protective Coating And Painting

- All ferrous materials whose surfaces are subject to rust, petting and/or corrosion from ambient atmospheric conditions shall be painted and/or coated for protection against such conditions. Such items shall include all piping, tubing, hangers, clamps, ground and/or side-wall supporting elements, valves and any other mechanical equipment of steel and/or iron construction.

- All galvanized steel piping, fittings, hangers, clamps... etc. shall be treated with one coat of inorganic zinc silicate (primer) and two coat of micaceous iron or (finish coat). The colors of the finish coat shall be designated by the engineer's representative.

- All underground steel pipes shall be treated with one coat of an approved bitumen base primer, two coats of coat tar enamel, and then wrapped with two layers of bituminized dense PVC tapes with 40% overlap for each layer.

Part 17: Cleaning and Adjustment

- All apparatus, accessories and piping shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt after installation and just prior to substantial completion to the full satisfaction of the engineer's representative.

- All valves, equipment and controls shall be adjusted to ensure proper operation.

Part 18: Protection

The contractor shall be responsible for the protection of his works and equipment until finally inspected, tested and accepted. All materials and equipment, which are not immediately installed after delivery to the site, shall be carefully stored according to suppliers' specifications. All open ends of work shall be closed with temporary covers or plugs during construction to prevent entry of abstract materials or foreign bodies. The contractor shall do his best to protect the work and material of other existing trades from damages that might be caused by his work or workmen and shall repair any damages thus caused at his own expense.

Part 19: Site Safety and Fire Protection

The fire protection contractor shall take all measures required to ensure safety and accident prevention for his work locations. Safety clothing, equipment and materials should be made available in sufficient amounts for the use of his staff and labors. Safety sins and instructions shall be displayed when and whenever required. Fire protection and prevention measures shall also be provided at all work locations. No open flame, welding, cutting, soldering and/or other work of hot nature shall be carried out adjacent to inflammable materials unless such materials are removed, insulated and/or sufficiently wetted to prevent catching fire from sparks. Ample fire extinguishers and/or water should be made available work shall be started unless the contractor receives a written permit duly signed by the engineer or his representative.




Part 20: Tests

The contractor shall furnish all labor, material, instruments, supplies/power sources and services and bear all costs for the accomplishment of the tests herein specified. The contractor shall correct all defects appearing during the tests, repeat the tests until no defects are disclosed, and then clean the test sites and leave the equipment clean and ready for use. The contractor shall also perform all tests other than those herein specified which may be required by the local fire authorities. Unless otherwise specified, assembled piping shall be flushed and tested as follows:

20 01 Flushing

Flushing shall be carried out at flows of 750 GPM for 6-inch (150mm) pipes and smaller. 1500 GPM for 8" (200mm).

20 2 Hydrostatic Tests

These tests shall be made for all piping sections at not less than 225 p.s.i. for not less than a period of 24 hours. All aboveground piping leakage shall be stopped. Other test for piping materials & mechanical equipment shall be performed to fulfill all requirements of NFPA 13, chapter 8, 1991. 20 03 Leakage Tests

These shall be made for all pipe sections at a pressure 150% (one and half times) of the working pressure of the system for a continuous period of 24 hours (Twenty four hours). No visible leakage of above ground piping shall be allowed and should be completely stopped. Leakage from under ground piping should not exceed the permissible values as per NFPA.




Division 15- Mechanical Work Section 15970 - Pump Room

Part 1: Design Criteria - Fire Water Pumping Systems

- The fire water pumping system is designed according to N.F.P.A No. 20 and shall supply fire fighting water to both of the automatic sprinkler network and the fire hydrants and hose reels networks. The fire water pumping system consists of two fire pump units and one jockey pump for pressurizing the piping mains. Either one or both fire pumps can run simultaneously or together depending on flow / pressure demands. Both pumps can start automatically, but once they start, they shall continue in running until manually stopped.

The jockey pump shall maintain the design pressure in the system and shall have the characteristics of running and stopping automatically by the action of the pressure switch it shall start when the pressure drops to 0.5 bar less than design point to compensate for any minor leaks the networks and shall automatically stop again when the pressure is restored back to its original value. If one or more sprinklers, or hose reels or one fire hydrant is opened the discharge shall be greater than the capacity of the jockey pump. Thus the pressure drop shall be greater than that which can be covered by the jockey pump. The main fire pump shall automatically start when the pressure drops to one bar less than design value. If the discharge from the system is still greater than the capacity of the main pump; or when the main fire pump fails, for any reason, to operate the pressure in the system shall drop to less than value design pressure at which the Auxiliary fire pump shall automatically start. Starting of any of the three pumps shall be signaled to the fire alarm control panel at which the fire alarm sounders can be actuated in the case of real fire occurring.

- Fire water pump capacity & total discharged as per design. Jockey pump capacity & total discharge head as per design.

Part 2: Fire Water Pumps Specifications

- The fire protection subcontractor shall furnish and install where shown on plans, Main electric fire pump units complete with pump, driver, controller, and accessories. The pumping units shall be listed by "Underwriters Laboratories U.L. listed and/or approved by associated factory mutual "F.M. Approved" or equal approved systems

and shall meet all requirements of the National. Fire protection Association , "NFPA" Code No. 20 . Each fire pump shall be designed to deliver the design from operating at design load, It shall have the characteristics to deliver not less than 150% of the rated capacity at a pressure not less than 65% of the rated pressure. The shut off pressure shall not exceed 120 % of the rated pressure when operating at the maximum synchronous speed of 2900 PRM section head shall be 2m (6.6 ft). The fire pumps shall be horizontal case mounted, horizontal split case, bronze fitted, single stage single suction centrifugal pump.

- The driver shall be horizontal, foot mounted, (TEFC) total enclosed fan cooled, ball bearing type, A.C. induction, squirrel cage motor, wound for 380 volts, 3-phase, 50cycles. Locked motor current shall not exceed the values specified in NFPA Code No 20.6

- Pump and motor shall be mounted on a common base plate of formed steel and shall be checked for alignment after the pump base is installed and grouted in place.




- Casing of pumps shall be cast iron of appropriate tensile strength of not less than 35000 Lbs. The bearing housing supports, and suction and discharge flanges shall be integrally cast with the lower half of the casing so that removing the upper half of the casing shall allow removing the rotating elements without disconnecting the section and discharge flanges.

- Impellers shall be of the enclosed type and shall be of vacuum cast bronze. They shall be dynamically balanced, keyed to the shaft and held in place with threaded shaft sleeves.

- The pump shaft shall be made of stainless steel to ASTM-A296-CF-8M or equal , accurately machined to give 2 true running rotating element , and shall be protected by bronze sleeves, key locked and threaded so that the sleeves tighten with the rotation of the shaft. A gasket shall seal between the impeller hub and the shaft sleeve to protect the pump shaft.

- The pump shall be equipped with renewable casing rings so designed that hydraulic pressure will seat the against the pump casing and shall be suitably locked to prevent rotation. The rotating elements shall be equipped with heavy duty grease lubricated ball bearings and water slingers, and with bearing housings so designed to allow lubricant being flushed through the bearing.

- Each pumping unit shall include the following accessories: 1. Eccentric tapered reducer to fit suction side, size. 2. Concentric tapered increase to fit discharge side size. 3. Suction and discharge pressure gauges. 4. Main relief valve. 5. casing relief valve 6. Circulation relief valve. 7. Automatic air releaser . 8. Splash shield.

- Each fire pump motor control shall be completely assembled, wired and tested by the manufacturer before shipment from the factory. The controller shall be located as close to as practical and within sight of the motor, and shall be protected from water escaping from the pumps or connections . The controller shall be of the combined manual and automatic, primary resister type, suitable for reduced voltage start and complete with: externally operable disconnect switch, circuit breaker with an interrupting capacity of design current magnetic starter, pressure switch, pilot lamps to indicate circuit breaker closed and power available, ammeter test link and voltmeter test studs and a two position selector switch marked "Automatic and manual.

- The pump driver, controller and all accessories shall be purchased under and unit contract. The pump shall be given a complete performance test under "positive suction pressure" and with a design suction lift. "Certified performance curves for the positive suction pressure and lift test shall be prepared and submitted for approval by the Engineer prior to shipment.

The pumps shall also be hydrostatic tested to at least twice the shut off pressure.

Part 3: Jockey Pump Specifications

The fire protection subcontractor shall furnish and install as shown on basement plans one jockey pump, electrically driven and having design rated capacity when operating at a total discharge design pressure of water at a maximum speed of 2900 RPM and design positive suction head. The pump shall be bronze fitted with cast iron casing, integral relief valve, bronze impeller, stainless steed shaft and mechanical seals.




It shall be mounted on a cast iron drip rim base plate and flexibly coupled to a three phase 380 volts, 50 cycles, 2900 RPM vertical totally enclosed fan cooled motor. The pump control shall be by adjustable pressure switch, air circuit breaker, magnetic across the line starter, a selector switch and a minimum run period timer.

Part 4: Spare Parts For Fire And Jockey Pumps

• The supplier shall submit for the approval of the Owner or his representative a spare part list for two (2) years operation of the pumps to be provided under this section. The spare parts to be furnished shall include, but not limited to the following: a) Fire Water Pumps

- Thrust bearings and line bearings. - Interstate bushints. - Complete set, case wear rings. - Complete set, packin/ mechanical seals. - Complete set, shaft sleeves and O-rings. - Complete set, all gaskets.

b) One complete unit, jockey pump and control (Option). - One set of bearings. - One set of channel rings. - Impeller complete. - Complete set of gaskets. - Complete set, mechanical seals.

• Other spares as recommended by the suppliers shall be submitted to the Engineer

for review. • The spare parts furnished under above item shall not be used as replacement

parts during the guarantee period.

If any part type is used as replacement during this period, it shall be accordingly adjusted.

Part 5: In-Line Strainers

In-line strainers shall be furnished and installed on the suction sid of each fire pump. They shall be of the Y Pattern strainers 100mm and above shall be cast iron body and cover, stainless steel screen, brass plug, and flanged ends to ANSI B 16.1. Strainers less than 100mm shall be all bronze body, screen and plug, and shall be screwed ends.

Part 6: Flexible Couplings

These shall be installed on the suction headers of the pumps. They shall be of the flanged rubber, double fold non collapsible type.

Part 7: Direct Reading Flow Meter And Test Connection

The direct reading flow meter and test connection shall be furnished and installed as shown on the plans. It shall be of the shunt gap or any approved type which can read water flows up to 3000 lit/min. The inlet of the test connection shall be from the common discharge




header of the fire pumps, the outlet shall be either to the fire water tank, or to the common suction header of the pumps. In the first, the test connection shall be provided by one stop valve to be installed at least 150 mm on the high pressure (up-stream) side of the flow meter. In the second case, when the test connection outlet is to suction header of the pumps, the test connection shall be provided by another stop valve to be installed at least 300mm on the low pressure (down-stream) side of the flow meter. All valves installed on the test connection shall be normally closed, and only opened when tests are carried out to verify the flow capacities of the pumps.




Division 15 - Mechanical Work

Section 15973 - Alarm Devices Part 1: Wet Pipe Sprinkler Alarm Valve

Alarm check valve shall be installed in the main distribution pipe as shown in the drawings Operation of the valve shall activate a signal inside the security console room .

Alarm Check valve shall be supplied for vertical installation and for variable pressure water supply, With retarding chambers. The valve shall be flanged and suitable for 12.5 bar . Max working water pressure, it shall have a cast iron body, Clabber hanger Assembly and pilot valve assembly . All other moving parts shall be of bronze . The alarm check valve shall be supplied complete with the following attachments: - Retarding chamber . - Some angle main drain valve. - Upstream and down stream press. gauges with gauge coks. - Alarm control and test valve - Water Motor gonge - O S & Y gate valve . - Alarm Pressure Switch/ 24 V DC

The alarm valve Should be FM/UL approved of the maker Viking - model J-

1 with epoxy coated outside..

Part 2: Water Flow Switch

The flow Switch shall be of vane pedal type with - Penumatical switch assembly - Flow switch shall be provided to activate a visual and audible alarm in

the main fire control panel. - Flow switch shall be of peddle type specially designed for service on

the Distribution piping of fire sprinkler system . - Flow switch shall have a single pole double throw switch wired to give

remote indication when flow occurs. - Flow switch shall be suitable for an operating press of 18 bar. Contact with water shall be of brass. Switch sensitivity shall be readily adjusted

Part 3: Pressure Switch

Three pressure switches of the adjustable type, 0-15 bars, shall be furnished and installed as shown on the plans, and connected to the discharge headers of the pumps. Shut-off ball valves shall be used to isolate the switches so that any one of them can be dismantled for readjustment or repair without idling the water system. The pressure switches shall be set to function the following:-

a) To start the jockey pump to compensate for leak causing the drop of pressure

in the system sand to shut it off when the pressure is built up and restored.




b) To start the main fire pump when the pressure drop in the system without being restored by the jockey pump. i.e when one or more sprinklers or hose reels or one hydrant are opened and the discharge is beyond the capacity of the jockey pump.




Division 15- Mechanical Work Section 15974 - Sprinklers

All sprinklers to have automatic sprinkler head shall be supplied & installed in the indicated area as shown in drawing the sprinkler to be approved type. UL/FM listed with specified rated temp & flow rates. Spare Sprinklers 36. NO. Spare sprinkler type to be supplied in the cabinet together With Special wrench.




Division 15- Mechanical Work Section 15975 - System Accessories Part 1: Drains and Test Connections

Drains and test connections shall be provided for the fire water systems as required and as shown on the drawings. As a rule, drain connections shall be provided at all low points of piping as at bases of risers and whenever necessary to ensure that all portions of piping can be completely drained.

Part 2: Automatic Air Release Valves

Automatic air release valves shall be gunmetal body suitable for fitting on 25 mm diameter pipes, and shall be furnished and installed at all tops of risers and high sections of piping to prevent the occurrence of air pocket and ensure complete charging of the water ring mains and riser columns.

Part 3: Pressure Gauges

Pressure gauges shall be furnished and installed on the suction and discharge beaders of the pumps up and down stream of the check valve, and on the pressure switches manifold. They shall have 8.9 cm dial and shall be provided with snubber unions and shut off cocks.




Division 15 - Mechanical Work Section 15976 - Hydrant System

Part 1: Fire Water Hydrants, Hose Reels & Fire Extinguisher

This shall cover all parts of the building up to the roof. Cabinets housing fire hydrants landing valves and hose reels are located at strategic locations suitable for covering all floor areas. Water supplies required for the hydrants and hose reels are provided by a series of main and auxiliary loops as shown on the plans and riser diagrams. Besides the hose reels which can be used as first aid fire fighting by ordinary or slightly trained persons, and the hydrants which can be used only by professional firemen or highly trained persons, fire extinguishers shall be provided, at all areas, for first aid fire fighting at the early stages of the fires. Three types of fire cabinets shall be furnished and installed as shown on the plans. They shall be either recessed or exposed according to locations and as approved by the owner or his representative.

1 01 Fire Hydrant Stand Pipe

Pillar type stand pipe C.I. with under ground flanged connection, the hydrant fitted with internal valve 4” & two 2 1/2 nozzles with BS coupling & chain.

1 02 Hose Cabinet Specifications

Mounting : on surface

Door : Cabinet with side hinged door.

Construction : High quality steel gauge 16

Finishing : red with lettering "FIRE HOSE"

Cabinet to be provided with two hose saddle for 30 m of

dia 2,5 fire hose.

1 03 Landing Valve Specifications

Type : Angle hose valve globe type

Inlet : Screwed BSP Female

Outlet : Screwed male with permanent 2,5" discharge

Instantaneous female connector complete with hronze

Balance cap, both to BS 336. Blank cap to be chained to valve body.




1 04 Hoses Specifications To be woven - jacketed (single) - length: 30m.

Jackets : synthetic wrap and filler

Lining : PVC

Couplings to be of the instantaneous snapping type according to BS 336

1 05 Nozzles&Accessories Specifications 2,5" adjustable spray to solid stream nozzle equipped with shut-off valve and appropriate 2,5" hose coupling. One coupling spanner for 2,5" couplings.

1 06 Hose Reels Specifications

Wall mounted hose reel cabinet with 1.5" hose (axial feed) .

Hose length : 30m with nozzle

Mounting : On surface

Door : Cabinet with side hinged door Construction: Steel

Finishing : Red enamel with lettering "Fire Hose Reel"

Dimension : Max. Dimension: H = 1000mm - W = 800mm

Inlet : 1.5" with water quick opening shut-off valve (to be

included in the delivery).

Outlet : Three position nozzle: shut-off/straight

Stream-/fog

Part 2: Cabinet Types 2 01 Combined Fire Hose Cabinets (Cfc)

These shall be located as shown on the plans and shall be arranged to house the following:

- One No. fire hydrant landing valve, gunmetal, globe type, 65mm (2.5in) nominal bore and complete with 65mm instantaneous female coupling to B.S, 336 The landing valve shall be at 120 cm max height above the finished floor level, and shall be feed by a 65 mm branch pipe from the main or auxiliary risers All landing valves shall be fitted with blind caps and security chains.

- One No. hose rack , swinging type and complete with 30 meters long , 40mm diameter, woven - jacketed synthetic wrap hose and a three way straight stream shut-of spray nozzle of chromium plated bronze or stainless steel.




The hose racks shall be installed at a maximum height of 150mm above floor level.

- One No. branch pipe with adjustable straight stream/shut-off/for nozzle.

- One Nos. fire extinguishers, the first being 5 kg. (12 LB) BCF extinguishers, and the second being 9 liters (2 Imp. Gal) water/gas extinguisher.

2 02 External Hydrant Cabinets (F.H.C.)

These shall be furnished and installed as shown on the plans and shall be Arranged to house only the following:

- Two Nos. fire hoses 2½” 30 M. Length. - Two No. adjustable multi-jet-nozzles 2½”. - One landing Valve 2½” -

2 03 Yard Cabinets (F.H-2)

These shall be furnished and installed as shown on the plans and shall be Arranged to house only the following:

- Two Nos. fire hoses 2½” 30 M. Length. - Two No. adjustable multi-jet-nozzle 2½”. - One landing Valve 2½”

Part 3: Fire Hose Rack Cabinets (FHRC) Shall be installed as shown on the plans and shall be arranged to house the following:

• One No. Hose rack complete with Valve, hose and nozzle. • One Nos. Portable fire extinguishers.




Division 15 - Mechanical Work Section 15977 - Pipes

Part 1: Pipes Fittings, Hangers and Supports 1 01 Pipes and Fitting

Pipes shall be seamless black carbon steel, standard weight schedule 40 and welded joints and fittings or grooved end, and screwed ends for diamless than 50mm. Pipe unions shall be used where indicated and as rule shall be used at intervals of long runs of pipes, and in bypasses and between shut off valves and equipment which need adjustments or repair work from time to time. Unions on pipes 65mm and above diameter shall be of steel flanges or grooved couplings each 6.00mm. Unions on pipes 50mm diameter or less shall be of galvanized cast iron screwed unions.

Samples of pipes fittings and unions shall be submitted for the Engineer's checking and approval before any supply orders or delivery to site are made.

1 02 Pipe Hangers and Supports

Shall be provided to secure pipes in place, to minimize their vibrations, and to maintain their grades for proper drainage.

They shall by of appropriate strength to carry the subject loads and at the same time should be installed i such a manner so as not to cause any harmful or damaging overloading to the structural members to which they are fixed. Horizontal pipe hangers shall be in accordance with the following schedule:-

PIPE SIZE HANGER ROD DIA MAXIMUMSPACING --------------- --------------------------- -----------------------------

UP to 32 mm 8 mm 240 cm 40 to 50 mm 10mm 320 cm 65 to 80 mm 13mm 320 cm 100 to 125 mm 16mm 360 cm Above 125 mm 20mm 400 cm

Supports for vertical pipes shall be at each floor level. Side wall supports for horizontal and vertical pipes, and pips run under A/C ducts shall be designed by the P.P.C. to suit every particular case . The designs shall be submitted to the Architect for study and approval. Samples of all types of pipe hangers, clamps, anchors, inserts, side wall supports shall be submitted to the Architect for approval prior to any use of such materials on site.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION (15)

PART (1)

PLUMBING & FIRE FIGHTING WORKS

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY ODAC

Division (15) Mechanical work







Section 15460 - Water Heaters Part 1 - General

1 01 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Project Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1 02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes commercial Electric Water Heaters

B. Section “Plumbing Piping” for water piping connections contain requirements that relate to this Section: .

1 03 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Project Specification Sections.

B. Product data including rated capacities of selected models, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties, and accessories, and indicating dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components, and piping and wiring connections.

C. Wiring diagrams from manufacturers detailing electrical requirements for electrical power supply wiring to water heaters. Include ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring required for final installation of water heaters and controls. Differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed and portions that are to be field installed.

1 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Standards: Provide water heaters complying with the following:

1. UL 174, “Household Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters”.

2. UL 1453, “Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters”.

B. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components complying with NFPA 70 ,“National Electrical Code”.

C. Listing and Labeling: Provide water heaters that are listed and labeled. The terms “listed” and “labeled” shall be as defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.

D. ASME Code Compliance: Provide water heaters and safety relief valves that comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

E. ASHRAE Standards: Provide water heaters with performance efficiencies not less than prescribed in ASHRAE 90A,”Energy Conservation in New Building




Design”.

1 05 WARRANTY

A. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace water heater units that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, tanks, coils, heat exchangers. This warranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents.

1. Warranty period is 5 years after date of Substantial Completion.

Part 2 - Product

2 01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Lochinvar Water Heater Corp.

2. Rheem Mfg.

3. Ruud Mfg. Div.; Rheem Mfg.

4. A.O. Smith Water Products Co. Div.; A.O. Smith Corp.

5. Patterson-Kelly Co. Inc.

6. Rycroft.

7. Approved equal.

2 02 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS A. Description: Automatic, commercial, electric; with vertical, 1035 kPa rated storage

tank, integral controls, drain valve, and relief valve.

B. Insulation: Fiberglass or polyurethane foam, surrounding tank.

C. Jacket: Steel, with baked-on enamel finish.

D. Tank: Glass-lined steel with anode rods and drain valve.

E. Heating Elements: Screw-in or fianged bolt-in immersion type, in multiples of 3 elements.

F. Controls: Adjustable immersion thermostat.

G. Safety Controls: Automatic, high-temperature-limit cutoff and low-water cutoff.

H. Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve: ASME rated and labeled.

2 03 WATER HEATER DESCRIPTION A. Type: copper-lined, steel tank type, with fixed convex ends, complete with

Vretical removable copper tube U- bend heating section suitable for heating tank contents with hot water.

B. Operating Pressure: tank to be designed for 690/1200 kPa water pressure in




tank and 1030/1800 kPa steam pressure in tubes and to be hydrostatically tested at factory to 1030/1800 kPa on tank side and 1580/2600 kPa on tube side.

C. Tank to be welded carbon steel plate in accordance with ASME Code, with two permanently attached lifting lugs, manhole with cover and all necessary connections for water inlet, water outlet, drain, relief valve, anti-vacuum valves, pressure gauge, thermometer, temperature controller and heating section.

D. Tank Lining: internal surfaces and surfaces in contact with water including manhole and cover and heating section connection surfaces are to be lined with sheet copper minimum 1.651 mm thick and 14.7 kg/m2 minimum weight. Flanges to be copper lined with copper gasket surface. Before lining the steel tank is to be thoroughly cleaned, welding slag removed and welds deposits, sharp edges and projections ground smooth. Copper lining to have integral circumferential reinforcing rings every 300 mm of shell length.

E. Connections 50 mm diameter and under to be threaded and over 50 mm diameter to be flanged. Heating section connection to be flanged. Connections to be non- ferrous couplings suitably capped at factory to preclude dirt and protect threads.

F. Heating Section to be constructed of seamless copper tubes expanded into copper or copper lined steel tube sheet with copper spun into each tube hole. Tubes to be supported on non-ferrous tube spacer and cross-bar. Adequate number of supports to be provided to prevent tube sag. Heating section to have flanged, close grain cast iron head with inside baffle and necessary connections for heating medium inlet and outlet, drain and vent.

G. Accessories: heater to be complete with anti-vacuum valves, pressure and temperature relief valve of type and size recommended by heater manufacturer and two mild steel supporting cradles, shipped loose for field installation .

H. Test: steel tank and copper lining to be individually hydrostatically tested at factory. With copper lining still under pressure water is to be heated to minimum 52 deg. C and vacuum of 737 mm of mercury is to be applied between shell and copper lining to evacuate water behind lining and to verify lining tightness under vacuum conditions. Certificate of test to be furnished by manufacturer.

I. Shop Drawings: submit for approval outline drawing of heater showing dimensions and size, location and rating of connections, prior to manufacturing heater.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3 01 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION A. General: Install water heaters floor mounted. Set and connect units in

accordance with manufacturer’s written installation instructions. Install units plumb and level and maintain manufacturer’s recommended clearances. Orient so controls and devices needing servicing are accessible.

3 02 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. The Drawings

indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:

1. Install piping adjacent to equipment arranged to allow servicing and




maintenance.

2. Connect hot and cold water piping to units with shutoff valves and unions. Connect hot water circulating piping to unit with shutoff valve, check valve, and union. Extend relief valve discharge to closest fioor drain.

B. Where water heater piping connections are dissimilar metals, make connections with dielectric unions specified in Section “Piping Specialties”.

C. Electrical Connections: Power wiring and disconnect switches are specified in Electrical Sections.

1. Grounding: Connect unit components to ground in accordance with the National Electrical Code.

3 03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Provide the services of supplier’s service represent at test inspect unit

installation, provide start-up service, and demonstrate and train Owner’s maintenance personnel as specified below.

1. Test and adjust operating and safety controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

B. Train Owner’s maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to start-up and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventative maintenance.

1. Review data in Operating and Maintenance Manuals.

2. Schedule training with at least 7 days, advance notice.

3 04 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING A. Perform the following before start-up final checks:

1. Fill water heaters with water.

2. Piping systems test complete.

3. Check for piping connections leaks.

4. Test operation of safety controls and devices.

B. Perform the following start-up procedures:

1. Energize circuits.

2. Adjust operating controls.

3. Adjust hot water outlet temperature setting.

END OF SECTION -15460




SECTION -15460

WATER HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Project Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes commercial Electric Water Heaters

B. Section “Plumbing Piping” for water piping connections contain requirements that relate to this Section: .

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Project Specification Sections.

B. Product data including rated capacities of selected models, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties, and accessories, and indicating dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components, and piping and wiring connections.

C. Wiring diagrams from manufacturers detailing electrical requirements for electrical power supply wiring to water heaters. Include ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring required for final installation of water heaters and controls. Differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed and portions that are to be field installed.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. UL Standards: Provide water heaters complying with the following:

1. UL 174, “Household Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters”.

2. UL 1453, “Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters”.

B. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components complying with NFPA 70 ,“National Electrical Code”.

C. Listing and Labeling: Provide water heaters that are listed and labeled. The terms “listed” and “labeled” shall be as defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.

D. ASME Code Compliance: Provide water heaters and safety relief valves that comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

E. ASHRAE Standards: Provide water heaters with performance efficiencies not less than prescribed in ASHRAE 90A,”Energy




Conservation in New Building Design”.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace water heater units that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, tanks, coils, heat exchangers. This warranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents.

1. Warranty period is 5 years after date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCT

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Lochinvar Water Heater Corp.

2. Rheem Mfg.

3. Ruud Mfg. Div.; Rheem Mfg.

4. A.O. Smith Water Products Co. Div.; A.O. Smith Corp.

5. Patterson-Kelly Co. Inc.

6. Rycroft.

7. Approved equal.

2.2 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

A. Description: Automatic, commercial, electric; with vertical, 1035 kPa rated storage tank, integral controls, drain valve, and relief valve.

B. Insulation: Fiberglass or polyurethane foam, surrounding tank.

C. Jacket: Steel, with baked-on enamel finish.

D. Tank: Glass-lined steel with anode rods and drain valve.

E. Heating Elements: Screw-in or fianged bolt-in immersion type, in multiples of 3 elements.

F. Controls: Adjustable immersion thermostat.

G. Safety Controls: Automatic, high-temperature-limit cutoff and low-water cutoff.

H. Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve: ASME rated and labeled.

2.3 WATER HEATER DESCRIPTION

A. Type: copper-lined, steel tank type, with fixed convex ends, complete with




Vretical removable copper tube U- bend heating section suitable for heating tank contents with hot water.

B. Operating Pressure: tank to be designed for 690/1200 kPa water pressure in tank and 1030/1800 kPa steam pressure in tubes and to be hydrostatically tested at factory to 1030/1800 kPa on tank side and 1580/2600 kPa on tube side.

C. Tank to be welded carbon steel plate in accordance with ASME Code, with two permanently attached lifting lugs, manhole with cover and all necessary connections for water inlet, water outlet, drain, relief valve, anti-vacuum valves, pressure gauge, thermometer, temperature controller and heating section.

D. Tank Lining: internal surfaces and surfaces in contact with water including manhole and cover and heating section connection surfaces are to be lined with sheet copper minimum 1.651 mm thick and 14.7 kg/m2 minimum weight. Flanges to be copper lined with copper gasket surface. Before lining the steel tank is to be thoroughly cleaned, welding slag removed and welds deposits, sharp edges and projections ground smooth. Copper lining to have integral circumferential reinforcing rings every 300 mm of shell length.

E. Connections 50 mm diameter and under to be threaded and over 50 mm diameter to be flanged. Heating section connection to be flanged. Connections to be non- ferrous couplings suitably capped at factory to preclude dirt and protect threads.

F. Heating Section to be constructed of seamless copper tubes expanded into copper or copper lined steel tube sheet with copper spun into each tube hole. Tubes to be supported on non-ferrous tube spacer and cross-bar. Adequate number of supports to be provided to prevent tube sag. Heating section to have flanged, close grain cast iron head with inside baffle and necessary connections for heating medium inlet and outlet, drain and vent.

G. Accessories: heater to be complete with anti-vacuum valves, pressure and temperature relief valve of type and size recommended by heater manufacturer and two mild steel supporting cradles, shipped loose for field installation .

H. Test: steel tank and copper lining to be individually hydrostatically tested at factory. With copper lining still under pressure water is to be heated to minimum 52 deg. C and vacuum of 737 mm of mercury is to be applied between shell and copper lining to evacuate water behind lining and to verify lining tightness under vacuum conditions. Certificate of test to be furnished by manufacturer.

I. Shop Drawings: submit for approval outline drawing of heater showing dimensions and size, location and rating of connections, prior to manufacturing heater.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. General: Install water heaters floor mounted. Set and connect units in




accordance with manufacturer’s written installation instructions. Install units plumb and level and maintain manufacturer’s recommended clearances. Orient so controls and devices needing servicing are accessible.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. The Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:

1. Install piping adjacent to equipment arranged to allow servicing and maintenance.

2. Connect hot and cold water piping to units with shutoff valves and unions. Connect hot water circulating piping to unit with shutoff valve, check valve, and union. Extend relief valve discharge to closest fioor drain.

B. Where water heater piping connections are dissimilar metals, make connections with dielectric unions specified in Section “Piping Specialties”.

C. Electrical Connections: Power wiring and disconnect switches are specified in Electrical Sections.

1. Grounding: Connect unit components to ground in accordance with the National Electrical Code.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. General: Provide the services of supplier’s service represent at test inspect unit installation, provide start-up service, and demonstrate and train Owner’s maintenance personnel as specified below.

1. Test and adjust operating and safety controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

B. Train Owner’s maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to start-up and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventative maintenance.

1. Review data in Operating and Maintenance Manuals.

2. Schedule training with at least 7 days, advance notice.

3.4 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

A. Perform the following before start-up final checks:

1. Fill water heaters with water.

2. Piping systems test complete.

3. Check for piping connections leaks.

4. Test operation of safety controls and devices.

B. Perform the following start-up procedures:




1. Energize circuits.

2. Adjust operating controls.

3. Adjust hot water outlet temperature setting.






Section 15450 - Water Tank Accessories

Part 1 – General

1.01 Related Documents

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Project Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This section includes mechanical works for tank accessories,

ladders, access doors, water level controls, instrumentation, tank ventilation….etc.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS.

A. Hangers and supports. B. Electrical requirements for mechanical works. C. Fire protection. D. Electric – Drive, fir pumps. E. Water distribution systems. F. Water distribution pumps. G. Steel structure works.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit lay out and shop drawings under provisions of general requirement of the con-

tract. B. Co-ordinate and establish positions of water stops, construction joints etc., in water

tank walls.

C. Submit wiring diagrams, details of components and panel construction and mounting details in respect of water tank level control and indication instrumentation.

D. Submit material sample and test certificates of construction materials, where asked

for.

E. Maintenance data for inclusion in operating and maintenance manual specified in ba-sic mechanical requirements.

1.05 REFERENCES

A. NEMA Standard No, I CS - Enclosures for electrical appliances.




B. Stainless steel for industrial applications.




Part 2 - Products

2.01 Water Tanks Ladders

A. Fabricate from type 316 (Austinitic) Stainless Steel, main rail shall be 1.25 inch diame-ter and rungs shall be 1 inch diameter in size. All joints shall be welded. Attach ladder to 10x10x 1 cm size base plate with drilled holes. Bolt the base Plate insert and weld ladder (at site) to attain good alignment.

B. Provide safety cage of 1 x 1/8 inch stainless steel flats for ladders exceeding eight (8) feet in height. Attach rigidly to ladder by bolting to specially prepared lugs on the lad-der rail (omit on ladders inside tanks).

C. Provide additional 1 inch diameter overhead rail bolted to ceiling soft, at the inside and outside of the tank access opening (in case of tanks with side access only).

D. Cast in stainless steel wall inserts (of pipe, puddle and stud plates at wall face) for at-taching ladder to wall. Use extra care to attain proper alignment and water tightness. Use appropriate detail to flash tanking membranes at ladder support bases.

2.02 WATER TANKS ACCESS DOORS

A. Double seal, light duty steel cover and frame; painted inside and out with white food

grade epoxy; 0f 60x60 cm, clear openings. B. The key holes shall be closed type and suitable soft sealing strips shall be used at the

sealing grooves to ensure tightness.

2.03 FLOAT VALVES

Float valves shall be modulating, pilot operated, angle pattern diaphragm valves of iron body, stainless steel. mounted construction with flanged ends complete with pilot assem-bly, type K copper capillary lines, mounting plate, plastic float and operating rod, adjustable stops etc. complete.

2.04 WELDED PUDDLE PIECE FLANGE

A. Use welded puddle piece flanges for all connections to water tanks, made below the overflow level.

B. Provide detail for minimum dimensions. C. Use puddle piece flanges fabricated from schedule 80 black steel pipes and welding

neck steel flanges for connections to steel pipe work. The assembly shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication.

D. Use integral flanges with studs/cap nuts at wall face and loose, split flanges to flash tanking membranes.

E. Provide synthetic membrane flashing (3 feet diameter) at all puddle flanges installed in the bottom of water tanks and integrate the same with the tanking.

2.05 WATER TANK LEVEL INDICATORS/CONTROLERS

A. Use controller / indicator from SAUTER Model GAO 201/0 or approved equal with re-

quired nos., of switch assemblies. B. Remote indicator panel . C. Attain the following functions:

- Water level indication.




- High/low water audio-visual alarms in the indicator panel. - Low water cut out of domestic booster pump set and fire pump set. - On site adjustment of alarm set points. - Provision for hook up with the Building Management System (BMS)

for critical alarms. D. General Requirements:

- All assemblies shall have enclosure to NEMA-4 (lP-44) as minimum requirements.

- Panels shall be fabricated from 1.5 mm thick sheet steel and shall have continuously welded butt joints. Apply to coats of red oxide primer and two coats of baked gray enamel. All required holes and cut-outs shall be done at the factory.

- Use heavy duty galvanized iron conduits (surface mounted) and painted sheet steel trunking for wiring.

- Use PVC insulated stranded (1.5mm2) copper wires with crimped on, sheathed terminal lugs for all interconnecting wiring. Do not use joints in the wire length. Use slip on ferrules and number all terminals, for quick identifica-tion.

2.06 WATER TANK VENTILATION

A. Provide water tank vent assemblies as detailed to enable free movement of air into and out of the water tanks, during filling and emptying of the tank. All air passages shall be covered with fine copper or plastic wire mesh to prevent the entry of flies and pests into the tank.




Part 3 - Execution

3.01 Welded Puddle Piece Flanges

A. Erect sleeves, puddle flanges etc., in the steel work perpendicular to the wall face and rigidly.

B. Ensure verticality of flange faces and alignment of bolt holes with connecting equip-ment (valves etc.).

3.02 LADDERS, ACCESS DOORS

A. Install, inserts in tank walls. Follow procedure given above for attaining proper align-

ment. B. Use cap nuts of corrosion resistant material for fastening ladder to wall.

4 Level Indication And Control Instrumentation

A. All internal wiring shall be done in a neat arid professional manner, using cable ties, slip-on- spiral plastic bundle sheaths etc. Provide sample free lengths to allow full swing of doors.

B. All components of the system shall be rated for Egypt ambient conditions as stipulated by Local authorities.

C. Co-ordinate with the electrical works and provide electrical power supply to the sys-tem. All conducting and wiring to the source is included in this section.

D. Comply with all regulations of the Ministry of Electricity and Water and requirements of the specifications for electrical works of the projects in all respect.

E. Provide relays/volt free contacts in terminal blocks for inter connecting with other sys-tems (like BAS).

F. Extend services to controlled equipment (like pump control panel). G. Panels shall be wall mounted with the centre line at 130cm above FFL

4.01 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

A. Install blank flanges / plugs to enable the steel works contractor to test the water tight-

ness of the tanks. B. On completion of works, clean the inside of the tanks thoroughly of all dirt, wash down

with water and drain C. Disinfect the tanks along with the disaffection and flushing of the system . D. Obtain satisfactory water analysis and submit to Engineer prior to handing over.




Division 15 - Mechanical Work Section -15440 - Plumbing Fixtures

Part 1 - General 1 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including the project General and Supplementary Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1 02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes plumbing fixtures and trim, fittings, and accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports associated with plumbing fixtures.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that

relate to this Section:

1. Architectural specification and drawings. 2. Section “Valves” for valves used as supply stops. 3. Section “Plumbing Specialties”

C. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include:

1. Accessories, appliances, appurtenances, and equipment specified in other sections. requiring plumbing services or fixture-related devices, as indicated.

1 03 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and the project Specification Sections.

B. Product data for each type of plumbing fixture specified, including fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, supports, construction details, dimensions of components, and finishes.

C. Wiring diagrams for field-installed wiring of electrically operated units.

1 04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of ANSI Standard A117.1, ”Buildings and Facilities – Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically Handicapped People”, with respect to plumbing fixtures for the physically handicapped.

B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that are “ listed “ and “ labeled “. The terms ”listed” and ”labeled” shall be as defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.

C. Design Concept: The Drawings indicate types of plumbing fixtures and are based on manufacturers, models, and performance characteristics.




Plumbing fixtures and having equal performance characteristics by other manufacturers may be considered provided that deviations in dimensions, operation, color or finish, or other characteristics are minor and do not change the design concept or intended performance as judged by the Engineer. Burden of proof for equality of plumbing fixtures is on the Contractor.

1 05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver plumbing fixtures in manufacturer’s protective packing, crating, and covering.

B. Store plumbing fixtures on elevated platforms in a dry location.

1 06 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below matching products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage, and identified with labels clearly describing contents.

1. Faucet Washers and 0-rings: Furnish quantity of identical units not

less than 10 percent of amount of each installed.

2. Faucet Cartridges and 0-rings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5 percent of amount of each installed.

3. Flushometer Repair Kits: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 10 percent of amount of each flushometer installed.

4. Provide a hinged-top wood or metal box, or individual metal boxes, having a separate compartment for each type and size of above extra materials.

5. Water Closet Tank Repair Kits: Furnish quantity of identical flush valve units not less than 5 percent of amount of each type installed.

6. Toilet Seats: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5 percent of amount of each type toilet seat installed.

7. Filter Cartridges: Furnish quantity of identical filter cartridges not less than 50 percent of amount of each type and size installed.

PART2 - PRODUCTS 2 01 PLUMBING FIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Provide plumbing fixtures and trim, fittings, other components, and supports as specified.

2 02 FAUCETS

A. Faucets General: Unless otherwise specified, provide faucets that are cast brass with polished chrome-plated finish.




B. Lavatory Faucets, ASME A112.18.1M, centered fitting, with hot and cold handles, 1.9 liters per minute (1/2 9 pm) flow control fitting in spout self – closing valves, wide pared fitting having in let shanks on 203 mm (8”) centers, push – pull operation with pop-up waste,…etc.

C. Sink Faucet, : ASME A112.18.1M, centered fitting, with hot and cold handles and swing spout, wide pared fitting.

D. Bathtub Faucet, : ASME A112.18.1M, cast-brass combination single- lever mixing valve and escutcheon.. Tub filler, diverter, shower, and flange. Polished chrome-plated finish on all exposed metal.

E. Shower Faucet: ASME A112.18.1M, cast-brass combination single- lever, pressure-balancing mixing valve and escutcheon, and shower, arm, and flange. Polished chrome-plated finish on all exposed metal.

2 03 FITTINGS, EXCEPT FAUCETS

A. Fittings General: Unless otherwise specified, provide fittings fabricated of brass, and polished chrome plated finish.

B. Lavatory Supplies and Stops, : Wheel handle angle stop, having 15 mm (1/2”) NPS inlet with wall flange and 9.5 mm (3/8”) by 305 mm (12”) long flexible tubing riser outlet.

C. Lavatory Traps, : Cast-brass, 32 mm ( 1-1/4” ) NPS adjustable P-trap with cleanout, 32 mm ( 1-1/4”) NPS nipple to wall, and wall flange.

D. Sink Supplies and Stops, : Wheel handle angle stop, having 15 mm (1/2”) NPS inlet with wall flange and 15 mm (1/2”) by 305 mm (12”) flexible tubing riser outlet.

E. Sink Trap: Cast-brass, 2” NPS adjustable P-trap with cleanout, 50 mm (2”) NPS nipple to wall, and wall flange.

F. Water Closet Supplies and Stops: Wheel handle angle stop, having 15 mm (1/2”) NPS inlet with wall flange and 15 mm (1/2”) by 305 mm (12”) long flexible tubing riser outlet with collar.

G. Bathtub Waste and Overflow Fittings, : Concealed 40 mm (1-1/2”), 20 gage, polished chrome-plated, tubular brass; lever-operated pop-up bath waste and overflow, spud with universal-type outlet connection suitable for 40 mm (1- 1/2“) tubing, or 40 mm (1-1/2”) solder-joint outlet connection on waste tee.

H. Bathtub Traps: Cast-brass, 40 mm (1-1/2”) NPS adjustable P-trap with cleanout, 40 mm (1-1/2”) NPS nipple to wall, and wall flange.

I. Trough-Type Urinal Supplies and Stops: Wheel-handle angle or straight stop, having 20 mm (3/4”) NPS inlet with wall flange.

J. Supply and drain plumbing service fittings not listed above shall be as specified and as scheduled.

K. Fittings installed concealed inside a plumbing fixture or within wall construction may be without chrome plate finish.

L. Escutcheons: Wall flange with screw.




M. Escutcheons: Polished chrome-plated, sheet steel wall flange with friction clips.

N. Deep Pattern Escutcheons: Wall flange with screw or sheet steel wall flange with friction clips, of depth adequate to conceal protruding roughing-in fittings.

O. Provide fittings specified as part of a fixture description, in lieu of fitting requirements above.

2 04 FLUSHOMETERS

A. Provide flushometers compatible with fixtures, with features and of consumption indicated.

B. Construction: Cast-brass body, brass or copper pipe or tubing inlet with wall flange and tailpiece with spud, screwdriver check stop, vacuum breaker, and brass lever handle actuation except where other variations are specified. Type shall be diaphragm operation except where other type is specified.

C. Finish: Exposed metal parts shall be polished chrome-plated, except components installed in a concealed location may be rough brass or unfinished.

D. Water Closet Flushometers, : Furnish with following features.

1. Non-hold-open feature. 2. Wheel handle stop. 3. Metal push button actuation. 4. Seat bumper on stop. 5. Hydraulic push-button actuator. 6. Bedpan washer diverter valve, spray head, and support. 7. Trap primer connection. 8. Furnish flushometers with factory-set or field-adjusted

maximum water consumption per cycle: a) Consumption: 11.41itres (3.0 U.S.gallons) per flushing cycle.

2 05 TOILET SEATS

A. General: Provide toilet seats compatible with water closets, and of type, color, and features indicated.

2 06 SHOWER RECEPTORS

A. Shower Receptors: Provide shower receptors of shape, dimensions color. Where data is not complete, provide receptors with characteristics compatible with enclosures.

2 07 WATER CLOSETS

A. Water Closet. With flush valve: EWC to be white vitreous china floor mounted per, ASME/ANSI A112.19.2M, elongated bowl, siphon jet flush action for use with flush valve, 6 L per flush, wall outlet. Handicapped water closet, as shown on architectural plans, shall have 460 mm above




finished floor. Water closet dimensions to be 375 mm wide, 635 mm front back and 330 mm height. Provided with the following accessories:

1. Seat: extra heavy duty, solid plastic, open front less cover,

integrally molded bumpers, concealed check hinge with stainless steel post. Seat shall be posture contoured body design. Color shall be white.

2. Fittings and Accessories: Gaskets - neoprene; bolts with chromium plated caps nuts and washers.

3. Flush valve: Large diaphragm, exposed chrome plated, water saver design 6 L per flush, 25 mm screwdriver back check angle stop with cap, adjustable tailpiece, vacuum breaker flush connection and spud coupling for 40 mm top spud, wall and spud flanges. Seat bumpers shall be integral part of flush valve. Set centerline of inlet 292 mm above rim.

4. 10 mm angle valve with 300 mm long tube, blue index. B. Water closet with flush tank: Water closet to be white vitreous china Floor

Mounted with tank, closed coupled, flushometer tank, ANSI 112.19.2M, residential, elongated siphon jet action bowl, siphon jet 6 L per flush, back outlet with built-in douche. Water closet to be provided complete with the following accessories and trims from the same manufacturer or approved equal:

1. Seat: Standard-duty, residential type, regular, closed front with

cover, solid plastic, concealed check hinge with stainless steel post. Seat shall be posture contoured body design. Color shall be white.

2. Fittings and Accessories: Floor flange fittings-cast iron; Gasket-wax; bolts with chromium plated cap nuts and washers.

3. Tank fittings accessories; a) Flushing mechanism shall be: Pressure assisted close

coupled, flushometer tank, 6 L per flush. b) Stops, tank – angle.

4. 10 mm angle valve with 300 mm long tube, blue index, 2 08 SHOWERS

A. Shower: Shower tray to be white Acrylic receptor with anti-skid floor and 50 mm corner drain opening. Provide show with the following tray dimension, 900 x 900 x 175 mm deep and to be complete with the following accessories and trims. 1. Shower mixer Set: Ultra-Mix pressure balancing bath valve fittings

with volume control, ceramic disc cartridge, lever handle, integral stops, inlet and outlet to be 15 mm I.P.S. Adjustable shower head with 190 mL/s flow restrictor. Arm and flange.

2. 50 mm waste fitting with strainer 3. two built-in 15 mm valves with handles, wall flanges and blue and

red indices. 2 09 LAVATORIES

A. Lavatory : Oval type for installation under marble countertops, ASME/ANSI A112.19.2M, vitreous china, self-rimming, approximately 570 x 430 mm with one punch and two semi punched faucet holes. Lavatories to be provided with the following accessories:




1. Faucet: Solid cast brass construction, 15 mm three hole basin mixer, projection 120 mm, 32 mm Pull-Knob pop-up waste, fixed cast spout without handles. Control shall be waterless ceramic disc mixing cartridge type.

2. Drain: Cast brass with flat grid strainer, offset tailpiece, chrome plated.

3. Stops: Angle type. See paragraph 2.3. 4. Trap: Cast copper alloy, 40 by 32 mm P-trap, adjustable with

connected elbow and 1.4 mm thick (17 gauge) tubing extension to wall. Set trap parallel to the wall. Exposed metal trap surface and connection hardware shall be chrome plated with a smooth bright finish.

2 10 SINKS

A. Kitchen Sink: Residential, double bowl, stainless steel type 302, 16 gauge thickness, inset type for fixing into counter top, single drainer, with 10 cm high splash back, approximately 1500 mm with bowl on left or right or as shown in architectural plans, sink to be provided with the following trims and accessories.

1. 50 mm sink waste stainless steel grating. 2. 50 mm P-trap with wall tube. 3. wall flange for 50 mm tube trap. 4. stainless steel detachable overflow 5. 15 mm mixer, wall type, with S-swivel spout and wall flanges.

2 11 MISCELLANEOUS FIXTURES AND FITTINGS

A. Hose Bib: Single Faucet, Wall Mounted, Cast copper alloy. single faucet with replaceable mantel seat, removable replacement unit containing all parts subject to wear, mounted on wall 914 mm above floor to concealed supply pipe. Provide faucet with 20 mm hose coupling thread on spout and vacuum breaker. Four-arm handle on faucet shall be cast, formed or drop forged copper alloy. Escutcheons shall be forged copper alloy. including exposed part under valve handle when in open position, shall have a bright finish.

2 12 DISPOSERS

A. Disposers: Continuous-feed-type food waste disposer conforming to UL 430, 1/2 horsepower motor, (1450 rpm, 50 hz) (1725 rpm, 60 hz) overload protection, and wall-switch operated; corrosion-resistant construction, with quick-mounting feature, stainless steel sink flange, cushioned suspension, and stainless steel grinding chamber; jam-resistant cutting/shredding mechanism with swivel- mounted impellers on turntable, cast tool steel grinding ring, and cutlery steel under cutter blade; insulated housing for grinding chamber; and anti-splash guard and combination cover/stopper.

2 13 HOT WATER DISPENSERS

A. Hot Water Dispensers: ASSE 1023, instant on-off control on chrome-plated dispenser faucet with removable strainer; steel tank housing with insulated stainless steel inner tank; thermostat control for water temperature up to




88 deg C (190 deg F) with thermal overload protection; and 1.9 liters (1/2 U.S.gallon) minimum tank capacity.

2 14 WATER FILTERS

A. Water Filters: Cartridge type, with stainless steel or plastic housing and mounting bracket. Cartridges shall be replaceable, 250 mm long, activated carbon, wound fiber, or pleated, 10 micron removal rating, and suitable for potable water.

2 15 PLUMBING FIXTURE SUPPORTS

A. Support Types: Provide support of category specified, of type having features required to match fixture.

B. Provide supports specified as part of fixture description, in lieu of category and type requirements above.

2 16 RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS

- Duravite Germany - American Standard U.S.A - Roca Spain - Bobrick U.S.A - Ceramica Dolomite Italy - Mkinner porker U.S.A - Approved equal

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for cold water and hot water supplies and soil,

waste, and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installing fixtures.

B. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.

C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3 02 APPLICATION

A. Install plumbing fixtures and specified components, in accordance with designations and locations indicated on drawings.

B. Install supports for plumbing fixtures in accordance with categories indicated.

C. Recessed, box-mounted electric water coolers. 3 03 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING FIXTURES

A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb, in accordance with fixture manufacturer’s written installation instructions, roughing-in drawings, and referenced standards.

B. Install floor-mounted, floor-outlet water closets with closet flanges and gasket seals.

C. Install floor-mounted, back-outlet water closets with fittings and gasket seals.




D. Install wall hanging, back-outlet water closets with support manufacturer’s tiling frame or setting gage.

E. Install wall hanging, back-outlet urinals with gasket seals. F. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing fixtures securely to supports attached to

building substrate when supports are specified, and to building wall construction where no support is indicated.

G. Fasten floor-mounted fixtures and special fixtures having holes for securing fixture to wall construction, to reinforcement built into walls.

H. Fasten wall-mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls. I. Fasten counter-mounting-type plumbing fixtures to casework. J. Secure supplies behind wall or within wall pipe space, providing rigid

installation. K. Set shower receptors and mop basins in leveling bed of cement grout. L. Install stop valve in an accessible location in each water supply to each

fixture. M. Install trap on fixture outlet except for fixtures having integral trap. N. Install escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed

finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.

O. Seal fixtures to walls, floors, and counters using a sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant in accordance with sealing requirements as where specified in the specifications. Match sealant color to fixture color.

P. Install all water closets such that toilet seat will remain upright when listed. 3 04 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other sections of plumbing specifications. The drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:

1. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and

piping systems and plumbing equipment specified in other sections of plumbing specifications.

2. Install piping connections indicated between appliances and equipment specified in other sections, direct connected to plumbing piping systems.

3 05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

B. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation and after units are water pressurized. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until all units operate properly.

3 06 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings. and controls.

B. Operate and adjust disposers, hot water dispensers, and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning units and controls.




C. Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, electric water coolers, and faucets, shower valves, and flushometers having controls, to provide proper flow and stream.

D. Replace washers of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.

E. Clean fixtures, fittings, and spout and drain strainers with manufacturers’ recommended cleaning methods and materials.

F. Review the data in Operating and Maintenance Manuals.

3 07 PROTECTION

A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings. B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities, except when approved

in writing by the Owner. 3 08 FIXTURE SCHEDULE

A. Provide plumbing fixtures in a scheduled data sheet. Each Data Sheet begins with a new page.





Division (15) Mechanical Work

SECTION 15445 - SEWAGE PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1 02 SUMMARY

B. This Section includes the following sewage pumps and accessories for sanitary drainage piping systems in buildings:

1. Wet-pit-mounted, vertical sewage pumps. 2. Submersible sewage pumps. 3. Sewage pump reverse-flow assemblies. 4. Sewage pump [basins] [basins and pits] [pits]. 5. Packaged, submersible sewage pump units. 6. Packaged, wastewater pump units.

C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 2 Section "Packaged Pumping Stations" for applications in site-construction sewage pumping.

2. Division 15 Section "Sump Pumps" for applications in storm-drainage systems.

1 03 SUBMITTALS

D. Product Data: For each type and size of sewage pump specified. Include certified performance curves with operating points plotted on curves; and rated capacities of selected models, furnished specialties, and accessories.

E. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each sewage pump to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.





G. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of sewage pumps and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."

H. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.


I. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.

J. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.

K. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling.

1 06 COORDINATION

L. Coordinate size and location of concrete [bases] [bases and pits] [pits]. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2 01 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2 02 WET-PIT-MOUNTED, VERTICAL SEWAGE PUMPS

B. [Available ]Manufacturers:

1. Alyan Pump Company. 2. Armstrong Pumps Inc.




3. Aurora Pump; Pentair Pump Group (The). 4. Chicago Pump Company; a division of Yeomans Chicago Corporation. 5. Deming Pumps; Crane Pumps & Systems. 6. Federal Pump Corp. 7. Paco Pumps, Inc. 8. Sterling Peerless; Sterling Fluid Systems Group. 9. Swaby Manufacturing Co. 10. Tramco Pump Company. 11. Vertiflo Pump Company. 12. Weil Pump Company, Inc. 13. Weinman Div.; Crane Pumps & Systems. 14. Yeomans Chicago Corporation. 15. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

C. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, single-stage, centrifugal, end-suction sewage pumps complying with UL 778. Vertical, separately coupled, suspended pumps complying with HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3 for wet-pit-volute sewage pumps[ and with reverse-flow assembly].

1. Pump Arrangement: [Simplex] [Duplex] [Multiplex]. 2. Casing: Cast iron, with open inlet and threaded connection for NPS 2 (DN 50) and

smaller and flanged connection for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger discharge piping. 3. Impeller: [ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class No. 25 A or higher cast iron]

[ASTM A 532/A 532M, abrasion-resistant cast iron] [ASTM B 584, cast bronze]; statically and dynamically balanced, open or semiopen, nonclog design for solids handling; overhung, single suction, and keyed and secured to shaft.

4. Pump Shaft and Sleeve Bearings: [Stainless-steel] [Stainless-steel or steel] [Steel] shaft with bronze sleeve bearings. Include oil-lubricated, intermediate sleeve bearings at 48-inch (1200-mm) maximum intervals if basin depth is more than 48 inches (1200 mm), and grease-lubricated, ball-type thrust bearings.

5. Pump and Motor Shaft Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft misalignment.

D. Pump Discharge Piping: Manufacturer's standard galvanized-steel or bronze pipe.

E. [Basin] [Pit] Cover: Cast iron or coated steel and strong enough to support pumps, motors, and controls. See Part 2 "Sewage Pump [Basins] [Pits]" Article for requirements.

F. Cover Shaft Seal: Stuffing box, with graphite-impregnated braided-yarn rings and bronze packing gland.

G. Motor: Single-speed; grease-lubricated ball bearings. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."

1. Mounting: On vertical, cast-iron pedestal.

H. Controls: NEMA 250, [Type 1] <Insert other> enclosure, pedestal-mounted float switches; with floats, float rods, and rod buttons.[ Include automatic alternator to alternate operation




of pump units on successive cycles and to operate multiple units if one pump cannot handle load.]

1. Float Guide: Pipe or other restraint for floats and rods in basins of depth greater than 60 inches (1500 mm).

2. High-Water Alarm: Cover-mounted, [compression-probe] [mechanical-float-switch] [mercury-float-switch] [micropressure-switch] alarm, with electric bell; 120-V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell.

I. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. System Capacity: <Insert gpm (L/minute).> 2. Number of Pumps: [One] [Two] <Insert other>. 3. Each Pump:

a. Capacity: <Insert gpm (L/minute).> b. Solids Handling Capability: [2 inches (50 mm)] [2-1/2 inches (65 mm)] [3 inches

(75 mm)] <Insert inches (mm)> minimum. c. Total Dynamic Head: <Insert feet (kPa).> d. Speed: <Insert rpm.> e. Discharge Pipe Size: <Insert NPS (DN).> f. Motor Horsepower: <Insert value.> g. Electrical Characteristics:

1) Volts: [120] [240] [277] [480] <Insert value>. 2) Phases: [Single] [Three]. 3) Hertz: 60.

h. Unit Electrical Characteristics:

1) Full-Load Amperes: <Insert value.> 2) Minimum Circuit Ampacity: <Insert value.> 3) Maximum Overcurrent Protection: <Insert value.>

4. Alternator Control Required: [Yes] [No]. 5. Reverse-Flow Assembly Required: [Yes] [No].

2 03 SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS

J. Submersible, Fixed-Position Effluent Pumps: Factory-assembled and -tested, [simplex] [duplex] [multiplex], single-stage, centrifugal, end-suction, submersible, direct-connected effluent pumps complying with UL 778 and with HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3 for submersible sewage pumps.[ Include reverse-flow assembly.]

1. [Available ]Manufacturers:

a. ABS Pumps, Inc.




b. Aermotor Pumps, Inc. c. Barnes; Crane Pumps & Systems. d. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; ITT Industries. e. Federal Pump Corp. f. Flygt; ITT Industries. g. Goulds Pumps; ITT Industries. h. Grundfos Pumps Corp. i. HOMA Pump Technology. j. Hydromatic Pumps; Pentair Pump Group (The). k. KSB Inc. l. Liberty Pumps. m. Little Giant Pump Co. n. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. o. Metropolitan Industries, Inc. p. Myers, F. E.; Pentair Pump Group (The). q. Stancor, Inc. r. Sta-Rite Industries, Inc. s. Zoeller Company. t. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

2. Casing: Cast iron, with open inlet, legs that elevate pump to permit flow into impeller, and vertical discharge with companion flange for piping connection.

3. Impeller: [ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class No. 25 A or higher cast iron] [ASTM A 532/A 532M, abrasion-resistant cast iron] [ASTM B 584, cast bronze]; statically and dynamically balanced, closed or semiopen design for clear wastewater; overhung, single suction, and keyed and secured to shaft.

4. Pump and Motor Shaft: [Stainless steel] [Stainless steel or steel] [Steel], with factory-sealed, grease-lubricated ball bearings[ and double mechanical seals].

5. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type; with built-in overload protection; lifting eye or lug; and three-conductor, waterproof power cable of length required and with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump. Comply with Division 15 Section "Motors."

a. Moisture-Sensing Probe: Internal moisture sensor and moisture alarm. b. Motor Housing Fluid: [Air] [Air or oil] [Oil].

K. Submersible, Quick-Disconnect Effluent Pumps: Factory-assembled and -tested, [simplex] [duplex] [multiplex], single-stage, centrifugal, end-suction, submersible, direct-connected effluent pumps complying with UL 778 and with HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3 for submersible sewage pumps and with SWPA's "Submersible Sewage Pumping Systems (SWPA) Handbook" for guide-rail supports.[ Include reverse-flow assembly.]


a. ABS Pumps, Inc. b. Flygt; ITT Industries. c. HOMA Pump Technology. d. Hydromatic Pumps; Pentair Pump Group (The).




e. Metropolitan Industries, Inc. f. Myers, F. E.; Pentair Pump Group (The). g. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

2. Casing: Cast iron, with open inlet, legs (or guide-rail supports) that elevate pump to permit flow into impeller, and vertical discharge with companion flange for piping connection.

3. Impeller: [ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class No. 25 A or higher cast iron] [ASTM A 532/A 532M, abrasion-resistant cast iron] [ASTM B 584, cast bronze]; statically and dynamically balanced, closed or semiopen design for clear wastewater; overhung, single suction, and keyed and secured to shaft.


5. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type; with built-in overload protection; lifting eye or lug; and three-conductor, waterproof, power cable of length required and with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump. Comply with Division 15 Section "Motors."


6. Guide-Rail Supports: Include the following for each sewage pump:

a. Guide Rails: Vertical pipes or structural members, made of galvanized steel or other corrosion-resistant metal, attached to baseplate and basin sidewall or cover.

b. Baseplate: Corrosion-resistant metal plate, attached to basin floor, supporting guide-rail supports and stationary elbow.

c. Pump Yoke: Motor-mounted or casing-mounted yokes or other attachments for aligning pump during connection of flanges.

d. Movable Elbow: Pump discharge-elbow fitting with flange, seal, and positioning device.

e. Stationary Elbow: Fixed discharge-elbow fitting with flange that mates to movable-elbow flange and support attached to baseplate.

f. Lifting Cable: Stainless steel; attached to pump and cover at manhole.

L. Submersible, Fixed-Position Sewage Pumps: Factory-assembled and -tested, [simplex] [duplex] [multiplex], single-stage, centrifugal, end-suction, submersible, direct-connected sewage pumps complying with UL 778 and with HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3 for submersible sewage pumps.[ Include reverse-flow assembly.]


a. ABS Pumps, Inc. b. Aermotor Pumps, Inc. c. Barnes; Crane Pumps & Systems. d. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; ITT Industries. e. EBARA International Corporation; Standard Pump Division. f. Fairbanks Morse; Pentair Pump Group (The).




g. Flygt; ITT Industries. h. Goulds Pumps; ITT Industries. i. Grundfos Pumps Corp. j. HOMA Pump Technology. k. Hydromatic Pumps; Pentair Pump Group (The). l. KSB Inc. m. Liberty Pumps. n. Little Giant Pump Co. o. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. p. Metropolitan Industries, Inc. q. Myers, F. E.; Pentair Pump Group (The). r. Paco Pumps, Inc. s. Stancor, Inc. t. Sta-Rite Industries, Inc. u. Sterling Peerless; Sterling Fluid Systems Group. v. Swaby Manufacturing Co. w. Tsurumi (America), Inc. x. USFilter/Davco Products. y. Weil Pump Company, Inc. z. Weinman Div.; Crane Pumps & Systems. aa. Yeomans Chicago Corporation. bb. Zoeller Company. cc. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

2. Casing: Cast iron, with open inlet, legs that elevate pump to permit flow into impeller, and vertical discharge with companion flange for piping connection.

3. Impeller: [ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class No. 25 A or higher cast iron] [ASTM A 532/A 532M, abrasion-resistant cast iron] [ASTM B 584, cast bronze]; statically and dynamically balanced, open or semiopen, nonclog design and capable of handling solids; overhung, single suction, and keyed and secured to shaft.




M. Submersible, Quick-Disconnect Sewage Pumps: Factory-assembled and -tested, [simplex] [duplex] [multiplex], single-stage, centrifugal, end-suction, submersible, direct-connected sewage pumps complying with UL 778 and with HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3 for submersible sewage pumps and with SWPA's "Submersible Sewage Pumping Systems (SWPA) Handbook" for guide-rail supports.[ Include reverse-flow assembly.]





a. Chicago Pump Company; a division of Yeomans Chicago Corporation. b. Deming Pumps; Crane Pumps & Systems. c. EBARA International Corporation; Standard Pump Division. d. Fairbanks Morse; Pentair Pump Group (The). e. Federal Pump Corp. f. Flygt; ITT Industries. g. Gorman-Rupp Company (The). h. Goulds Pumps; ITT Industries. i. HOMA Pump Technology. j. Hydromatic Pumps; Pentair Pump Group (The). k. KSB Inc. l. Metropolitan Industries, Inc. m. Myers, F. E.; Pentair Pump Group (The). n. Paco Pumps, Inc. o. PUMPEX, Inc. p. Stancor, Inc. q. Sta-Rite Industries, Inc. r. Swaby Manufacturing Co. s. Tsurumi (America), Inc. t. USFilter/Davco Products. u. Weil Pump Company, Inc. v. Weinman Div.; Crane Pumps & Systems. w. Yeomans Chicago Corporation. x. Zoeller Company. y. <Insert manufacturer's name.>


3. Impeller: [ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class No. 25 A or higher cast iron] [ASTM A 532/A 532M, abrasion-resistant cast iron] [ASTM B 584, cast bronze]; statically and dynamically balanced, open or semiopen, nonclog design and capable of handling solids; overhung, single suction, and keyed and secured to shaft.









b. Baseplate: Corrosion-resistant metal plate, attached to basin floor, supporting guide rails and stationary elbow.





N. Submersible, Quick-Disconnect Grinder Pumps: Factory-assembled and -tested, [simplex] [duplex] [multiplex], single-stage, centrifugal, end-suction, submersible, direct-connected grinder pumps complying with UL 778 and with HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3 for submersible sewage pumps and with SWPA's "Submersible Sewage Pumping Systems (SWPA) Handbook" for guide-rail supports.


a. Alyan Pump Company. b. EBARA International Corporation; Standard Pump Division. c. Environment One Corporation. d. Flygt; ITT Industries. e. HOMA Pump Technology. f. Hydromatic Pumps; Pentair Pump Group (The). g. Liberty Pumps. h. Myers, F. E.; Pentair Pump Group (The). i. Stancor, Inc. j. Vaughan Co., Inc. k. Weil Pump Company, Inc. l. Zoeller Company. m. <Insert manufacturer's name.>


3. Impeller: Bronze or stainless steel; statically and dynamically balanced, with stainless-steel cutter, grinder, or slicer assembly and capable of handling solids; overhung, single suction, and keyed and secured to shaft.









b. Baseplate: Corrosion-resistant metal plate, attached to basin floor, supporting guide rails and stationary elbow.





O. Pump Discharge Piping: Factory or field fabricated, [ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, galvanized-steel pipe] [bronze pipe] [copper tube] <Insert other pipe material>.

P. [Basin] [Pit] Cover: Cast iron or coated steel and suitable to support controls. See Part 2 "Sewage Pump [Basins] [Pits]" Article for other requirements.

Q. Controls: NEMA 250, [Type 1] <Insert other> enclosure, pedestal-mounted float switch; with floats, float rods, and rod buttons.

R. Controls: NEMA 250, [Type 1] <Insert other> enclosure, pedestal-mounted float switch; with floats, float rods, and rod buttons. Include automatic alternator to alternate operation of pump units on successive cycles and to operate multiple units if one pump cannot handle load.

S. Controls: NEMA 250, [Type 1] <Insert other> enclosure, pedestal mounted unless wall mounting is indicated; with two [mechanical- or mercury-float or micropressure] [mechanical-float] [mercury-float] [micropressure] switches in NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosures; mounting rod; and electric cables.

T. Controls: NEMA 250, [Type 1] <Insert other> enclosure, pedestal mounted unless wall mounting is indicated; with three [mechanical- or mercury-float or micropressure] [mechanical-float] [mercury-float] [micropressure] switches in NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosures; mounting rod; and electric cables. Include automatic alternator to alternate operation of pump units on successive cycles and to operate multiple units if one pump cannot handle load.


2. High-Water Alarm: Cover-mounted, compression-probe alarm, with electric bell; 120-V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell.

3. High-Water Alarm: Rod-mounted, NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosure with [mechanical- or mercury-float or micropressure] [mechanical-float] [mercury-float] [micropressure]-switch alarm matching control and electric bell; 120-V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell.




U. Capacities and Characteristics:


a. Capacity: <Insert gpm (L/minute).> b. Solids Handling Capability: [Not applicable] [2 inches (50 mm)] [2-1/2 inches

(65 mm)] [3 inches (75 mm)] <Insert inches (mm)> minimum. c. Total Dynamic Head: <Insert feet (kPa).> d. Speed: <Insert rpm.> e. Discharge Pipe Size: <Insert NPS (DN).> f. Motor Horsepower: <Insert value.> g. Electrical Characteristics:


h. Unit Electrical Characteristics:


4. Alternator Control Required: [Yes] [No]. 5. Guide-Rail Supports Required: [Yes] [No].

2 04 SEWAGE PUMP REVERSE-FLOW ASSEMBLIES

V. [Available ]Manufacturers:

1. Chicago Pump Company; a division of Yeomans Chicago Corporation. 2. Federal Pump Corp. 3. Paco Pumps, Inc. 4. Sterling Peerless; Sterling Fluid Systems Group. 5. Weil Pump Company, Inc. 6. Yeomans Chicago Corporation. 7. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

W. Description: Factory-fabricated, sewage pump reverse-flow assembly for factory or field assembly and installation in sewage pump [basin] [basin or pit] [pit]. Include the following corrosion-resistant-metal components:

1. Inlet Fitting: One combination inlet-overflow strainer fitting. 2. Valves: Two shutoff valves and two check valves. 3. Strainers: Two strainer housings with reverse-flow, self-flushing strainers.




4. Pipe and Fittings: Size and configuration required to connect to sewage pumps and piping.

2 05 SEWAGE PUMP BASINS

X. Description: Factory fabricated basin with sump, pipe connections, and separate cover.

Y. Sump: Fabricate watertight, with sidewall openings for pipe connections.

1. Material: [Cast iron] [Cast iron or fiberglass] [Fiberglass] <Insert other>. 2. Reinforcement: Mounting plates for pumps, fittings[, guide-rail supports,] and

accessories. 3. Anchor Flange: Same material as or compatible with sump, cast in or attached to sump,

in location and of size required to anchor basin in concrete slab.

Z. Cover: Fabricate with openings having gaskets, seals, and bushings; for access to pumps, pump shafts, control rods, discharge piping, vent connections, and power cables.

1. Material: [Cast iron] [Cast iron or steel with bituminous coating] [Steel with bituminous coating].

2. Reinforcement: Steel or cast iron, capable of supporting foot traffic for basins installed in foot-traffic areas.

AA. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Material: [Cast iron] [Fiberglass] <Insert other>. 2. Capacity: <Insert gal (L).> 3. Diameter: <Insert inches (mm).> 4. Depth: <Insert inches (mm).> 5. Inlet No. 1:

a. Drainage Pipe Size: <Insert NPS (DN).> b. Bottom of Sump to Centerline: <Insert inches (mm).> c. Type: [Flanged] [Hubbed] [Threaded] outside.

6. Inlet No. 2:


7. Inlet No. 3:





8. Sidewall Outlet:

a. Discharge Pipe Size: <Insert NPS (DN).> b. Bottom of Sump to Centerline: <Insert inches (mm).> c. Type: [Hubbed inside] [Hubbed outside] <Insert other>.

9. Cover:

a. Material: [Cast iron] [Cast iron or steel with bituminous coating] [Steel with bituminous coating].

b. Diameter: <Insert inches (mm).> c. Manhole Required: [Yes] [No]. d. Vent Size: <Insert NPS (DN).>

2 06 SEWAGE PUMP PITS

BB. Description: Concrete pit with sump, pipe connections, curb frame, and separate cover.

CC. Sump: Construct of watertight, cast-in-place, reinforced concrete with sidewall openings for pipe connections. Cast-in-place concrete, formwork, and reinforcement are specified in Division 3 "[Cast-in-Place Concrete] [Cast-in-Place Concrete (Limited Applications)]."

1. Pipe Connections: Sleeved openings large enough for mechanical sleeve seals for drainage piping. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" and drainage piping is specified in Division 15 Section "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

DD. Curb Frame and Cover:

1. Curb Frame Material: Galvanized steel or steel with bituminous coating.

a. Pattern: [Angle-cross-section shape with flat top surface] [Z-cross-section shape with raised outer rim of height matching cover, for recessed mounting with installed cover flush with top of floor slab].

2. Cover: Fabricate with openings having gaskets, seals, and bushings; for access to pumps, pump shafts, control rods, discharge piping, vent connections, and power cables.


b. Reinforcement: Steel or cast iron, capable of supporting foot traffic for basins installed in foot-traffic areas.

EE. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Capacity: <Insert gal (L).> 2. Inside Dimensions: <Insert inches (mm).>




3. Depth: <Insert inches (mm).> 4. Inlet No. 1:

a. Drainage Pipe Size: <Insert NPS (DN).> b. Bottom of Pit to Centerline: <Insert inches (mm).>

5. Inlet No. 2:


6. Inlet No. 3:


7. Sidewall Outlet:

a. Forced-Main Pipe Size: <Insert NPS (DN).> b. Bottom of Pit to Centerline: <Insert inches (mm).>

8. Curb Frame:

a. Material: [Galvanized steel] [Steel with bituminous coating]. b. Pattern: <Insert pattern.>

9. Cover:


b. Dimensions: <Insert inches (mm).> c. Manhole Required: [Yes] [No]. d. Vent Size: <Insert NPS (DN).>

2 07 PACKAGED, SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMP UNITS

FF. Grinder Units: Factory-assembled and -tested, [simplex] [duplex], single-stage, centrifugal, end-suction, automatic-operation, direct-connected sewage pumps complying with UL 778 and HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3 for submersible, grinder sewage pumps.


a. ABS Pumps, Inc. b. Barnes; Crane Pumps & Systems. c. Environment One Corporation. d. Goulds Pumps; ITT Industries. e. Liberty Pumps.




f. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. g. Myers, F. E.; Pentair Pump Group (The). h. Zoeller Company. i. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

2. Casing: Cast iron. 3. Impeller: Stainless-steel grinder type with shredding ring. 4. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type; with built-in overload protection; and

three-conductor, waterproof power cable of length required and with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."

5. Control: Manufacturer's standard panel for one pump. 6. Controls: Automatic, with mechanical- or mercury-float switches and alternator. 7. Pump Discharge Piping: Factory- or field-fabricated, [ASTM A 53/A 53M,

Schedule 40, galvanized-steel pipe] [bronze pipe] [copper tube] <Insert other pipe material>.

8. Basin: Watertight and of size for [one pump] [two pumps] with inlet pipe connection and gastight cover with vent and pump discharge connections.

GG. Nonclog Units: Factory-assembled and -tested, [simplex] [duplex], single-stage, centrifugal, end-suction, automatic-operation, direct-connected sewage pumps complying with UL 778 and with HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3 for submersible, nonclog sewage pumps.


a. Aermotor Pumps, Inc. b. Barnes; Crane Pumps & Systems. c. Goulds Pumps; ITT Industries. d. Grundfos Pumps Corp. e. Hydromatic Pumps; Pentair Pump Group (The). f. Liberty Pumps. g. Little Giant Pump Co. h. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. i. Myers, F. E.; Pentair Pump Group (The). j. Paco Pumps, Inc. k. Sta-Rite Industries, Inc. l. Zoeller Company. m. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

2. Casing: Cast iron. 3. Impeller: Brass; statically and dynamically balanced, nonclog design, and capable of

handling 2-inch- (50-mm-) diameter solids. 4. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type; with built-in overload protection; and

three-conductor, waterproof power cable of length required and with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."

5. Control: Manufacturer's standard panel for one pump. 6. Controls: Automatic, with mechanical- or mercury-float switches and alternator.




7. Pump Discharge Piping: Factory- or field-fabricated, [ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, galvanized-steel pipe] [bronze pipe] [copper tube] <Insert other pipe material>.

8. Basin: Watertight and of size for [one pump] [two pumps] with inlet pipe connection and gastight cover with vent and pump discharge connections.

HH. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. System Capacity: <Insert gpm (L/minute).> 2. Number of Pumps: [One] [Two]. 3. Each Pump:

a. Capacity: <Insert gpm (L/minute).> b. Total Dynamic Head: <Insert feet (kPa).> c. Speed: <Insert rpm.> d. Discharge Pipe Size: <Insert NPS (DN).> e. Motor Horsepower: <Insert value>. f. Electrical Characteristics:

1) Volts: [120] [240] [277] [480] <Insert value> 2) Phases: [Single] [Three]. 3) Hertz: 60.

g. Unit Electrical Characteristics:


4. Alternator Control Required: [Yes] [No]. 5. Basin: Watertight[ plastic] and size for [one pump] [two pumps].

2 08 PACKAGED, WASTEWATER PUMP UNITS

II. Pedestal Units: Factory-assembled and -tested, single-stage, centrifugal, end-suction, automatic-operation, basin-mounted effluent pump unit.


a. Alyan Pump Company. b. Federal Pump Corp. c. Milton Roy Company; Hartell Div. d. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

2. Pump Body and Impeller: Corrosion-resistant materials. 3. Motor: With built-in overload protection and mounted vertically on basin cover.

Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."




4. Power Cord: Three-conductor, waterproof cable of length required but not less than 72 inches (1830 mm) and with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump.

5. Control: Float switch. 6. Basin: Watertight coated steel or plastic with inlet pipe connection and gastight cover

with vent and pump discharge connections.

a. Capacity: [2 gal (7.6 L)] [5 gal (18.9 L)] <Insert other> minimum. b. Inlet Connection: [NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40)] <Insert other> minimum. c. Vent Connection: [NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40)] <Insert other> minimum.

JJ. Submersible Units: Factory-assembled and -tested, single-stage, centrifugal, end-suction, automatic-operation, submersible effluent pump unit.


a. ABS Pumps, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; ITT Industries. c. Goulds Pumps; ITT Industries. d. Grundfos Pumps Corp. e. Liberty Pumps. f. Little Giant Pump Co. g. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. h. Myers, F. E.; Pentair Pump Group (The). i. Sta-Rite Industries, Inc. j. Zoeller Company. k. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

2. Pump Body and Impeller: Corrosion-resistant materials. 3. Pump Seals: Mechanical type. 4. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type, with built-in overload protection.

Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors." 5. Power Cord: Three-conductor, waterproof cable of length required but not less than 72

inches (1830 mm) and with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump.

6. Control: Float switch. 7. Basin: Watertight plastic with inlet pipe connection and gastight cover with vent and

pump discharge connections.

a. Capacity: [2 gal (7.6 L)] [5 gal (18.9 L)] <Insert other> minimum. b. Inlet Connection: [NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40)] <Insert other> minimum. c. Vent Connection: [NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40)] <Insert other> minimum.

KK. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Capacity: <Insert gpm (L/minute).> 2. Total Dynamic Head: <Insert feet (kPa).> 3. Speed: <Insert rpm.>




4. Discharge Pipe Size: <Insert NPS (DN).> 5. Motor Horsepower: <Insert value>. 6. Electrical Characteristics:

a. Volts: [120] [240] <Insert value>. b. Phases: [Single] [Three]. c. Hertz: 60. d. Full-Load Amperes: <Insert value.> e. Minimum Circuit Ampacity: <Insert value.> f. Maximum Overcurrent Protection: <Insert value.>

7. Basin:

a. Material: [Coated steel] [Coated steel or plastic] [Plastic]. b. Capacity: [2 gal (7.6 L)] [5 gal (18.9 L)] <Insert other> minimum. c. Inlet Connection: [NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40)] <Insert other> minimum. d. Discharge Connection: [NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32)] <Insert other> minimum. e. Vent Connections: [NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40)] <Insert other> minimum.

2 09 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

LL. [Available ]Manufacturers:

1. Anamet, Inc. 2. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. 3. Flexicraft Industries. 4. Flex-Pression, Ltd. 5. Flex-Weld, Inc. 6. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. 7. Mercer Rubber. 8. Metraflex, Inc. 9. Proco Products, Inc. 10. Tozen America Corporation. 11. Unaflex Inc. 12. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

MM. Description: [125-psig (860-kPa)] <Insert other> minimum working-pressure rating and ends matching pump connections:

1. Bronze Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, bronze inner tubing covered with bronze wire braid. Include copper-tube ends or bronze flanged ends, braze-welded to tubing.

2. Stainless-Steel Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-steel inner tubing covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include stainless-steel nipples or flanges, welded to tubing.




2 10 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM INTERFACE

NN. Provide auxiliary contacts in pump controllers for interface to building automation system. Include the following:

1. On-off status of each pump. 2. Alarm status.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3 01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for plumbing piping to verify actual locations of sanitary drainage and vent piping connections before sewage pump installation.

3 02 CONCRETE

B. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for pumps and controllers. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around full perimeter of base.

2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

C. Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in Division 3.

3 03 INSTALLATION

D. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."

E. Install sewage pumps according to applicable requirements in HI 1.4.

F. Install pumps and arrange to provide access for maintenance including removal of motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.

G. Suspend wet-pit-mounted, vertical sewage pumps from [basin] [basin and pit] [pit] covers. Make direct connections to sanitary drainage piping.




H. Set submersible sewage pumps on [basin] [basin and pit] [pit] floors. Make direct connections to sanitary drainage piping.

1. Anchor guide-rail supports to [basin] [basin and pit] [pit] bottoms and sidewalls or covers. Install pumps so pump and discharge pipe disconnecting flanges make positive seals when pumps are lowered into place.

I. Install sewage pump basins and connect to drainage and vent piping. Brace interior of basins according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent distortion or collapse during concrete placement. Set basin cover and fasten to basin top flange. Install cover so top surface is flush with finished floor.

J. Construct sewage pump pits and connect to drainage and vent piping. Set pit curb frame recessed in and anchored to concrete. Fasten pit cover to pit curb flange. Install cover so top surface is flush with finished floor.

K. Install packaged, submersible sewage pump units and make direct connections to drainage and vent piping.

L. Install packaged, wastewater pump unit basins on floor or concrete base unless recessed installation is indicated. Make direct connections to drainage and vent piping.

M. Support piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps.

3 04 CONNECTIONS

N. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Drainage and Vent Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

O. Install piping adjacent to sewage pumps to allow service and maintenance.

P. Connect sanitary drainage and vent piping to pumps. Install discharge piping equal to or greater than size of pump discharge piping. Install vent piping equal to or greater than size of pump basin vent connection. Refer to Division 15 Section "Sanitary Drainage and Vent Piping."

1. Install flexible connectors adjacent to pumps in discharge piping. 2. Install check and shutoff valves on discharge piping from each pump. Install unions on

pumps having threaded pipe connections. Install valves same size as connected piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves for sanitary waste piping.

Q. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

R. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."




3 05 STARTUP SERVICE

S. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Verify bearing lubrication. 3. Disconnect couplings and check motors for proper direction of rotation. 4. Verify that each pump is free to rotate by hand. If pump is bound or drags, do not

operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected. 5. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application. 6. <Insert additional startup steps if any.>

T. Start pumps without exceeding safe motor power:

1. Start motors. 2. Open discharge valves slowly. 3. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors.

U. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

V. Remove and replace damaged and malfunctioning components.

1. Pump Controls: Set pump controls for automatic start, stop, and alarm operation as required for system application.

2. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated, or if not indicated, for normal operation.

W. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3 06 DEMONSTRATION

X. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain[ controls and] pumps. Refer to Division 1 Section "[Closeout Procedures] [Demonstration and Training]."

END OF SECTION 15445




Division 15 - Mechanical Work Section 15010 Basic Requirements For Plumbing And Fire Fighting Works

Part 1: General 1 01 Related Documents

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General ...and Supplementary Conditions and Project General Requirements of the Specification Sections, apply to this and the other sections.

1 02 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for mechanical installations and includes requirements common to more than one section. It expands and supplements the requirements specified in the specification sections.


A. Manufacturer’s Recommendations: Where installation procedures or any part thereof are required to be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being installed, or as requested by the Engineer, printed copies of these recommendations shall be furnished to the Engineer prior to installation. Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are received. Failure to furnish these recommendations can be cause for rejection of the material

B. Multiple Units: When two or more units of materials or equipment of the

same type or class are required, these units shall be products of one manufacturer.

C. Factory testing for locally manufactured/assembled equipment is to

comply with the relevant standards’ recommendations and to be witnessed by the Engineer.

D. Factory testing for equipment obtained from abroad is to be witnessed

by the Engineer. Factory testing shall be for at least the number of equiment indicated below. The units that will be tested shall be selected by the Engineer. Witness test is to comply with the relevant standards’ recommendations. Submit report including all testing items, testing procedures and relevant standards. The following equipment shall be tested at factory:

- Sanitary fixtures - Pipes and Fittings - Fire fighting pumps. - Electric water heaters. - Valves

1 04 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

A. In addition to the requirements shown or specified, comply with the




latest current applicable standards, specifications or codes published by the following organizations:

NFPA : National Fire Protection Association ASME : American Society of Mechanical Engineering NPC : National Plumbing Code UPC : Uniform Plumbing code ASPE : American Society of Plumbing Engineers. ANSI : American Society for Testing and Materials. AWS : American Welding Society. AWWA : American Water Works Association. ASTM : American National Standards Institute.

1 05 ENGINEER’S DRAWINGS

A. Engineer’s Drawings are diagrammatic and are not to be scaled. Measurements are to be made from established bench mark.

B. Engineer’s Drawings are to serve as working drawings for Contractor’s

shop drawings. Since the layout of equipment, accessories, specialties, piping systems are diagrammatic, they do not necessarily indicate every required valve, fitting, trap, transition, controls, vessel tanks, or similar items required for a complete installation. Provide such items as are required for proper and complete installation of the work.

C. No portion of the work requiring a shop drawing or sample

submission is to be commenced until submission has reviewed by the Engineer. All such portions of the work are to be in accordance with reviewed shop drawings and samples.

D. Check all Architectural, Structural, Electrical and HVAC drawings in laying out work to verify adequacy of space in which work is to be installed. Notify the Engineer where space appears inadequate.

1 06 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Two months prior to commencement of work, submit to the Engineer for review and approval, detailed, dimensioned shop drawings.

B. Shop drawings are to be new drawings prepared by the Contractor

and are not to be reproductions or tracings of the Engineer’s Drawings.

C. In preparing shop drawings, establish lines and levels for the work specified and check the drawings to avoid interference with structural features and other works.

D. Shop drawings are to show to-scale dimensions of equipment, pipes,

fittings, controls, hangers, accessories, etc. in plan and elevation with clearances and relation to space assigned.

E. Immediately call to the attention of the Engineer, if any,

interferences and contradiction between tender documents and/or space limitations for clarification in writing during tender stage and construction phases.

F. Shop drawings are to include floor layouts drawn to a minimum scale

of 1/100 with Mechanical Room shafts and Toilet detail layouts to a




minimum scale of 1/50, showing all equipment and piping to be installed. For critical areas, provide section drawings to a minimum scale of 1/50.

1 07 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Shop drawings are to include a set of composite coordination drawings, in plan and sections, showing major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and other building components. Drawings to be to an accurate scale of 1/50 or larger.

B. Prepare floor plans, elevations, sections, and details to

conclusively coordinate and integrate all installations. Show space requirements for installation and access. Indicate locations where space is limited, and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including, but not necessarily limited to, the following:

- Proposed locations of piping, equipment, and materials, include the following:

1. Planned piping layout, including valve and specialty

locations and valve stem movement. 2. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation. 3. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment,

including space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance.

4. Equipment service connections and support details. 5. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. 6. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. 7. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and

bases. 8. Sizes and locations of access panels and doors.

- Scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large

equipment into the building during construction. - Floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors,

walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations.

- Reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air outlets and inlets, light fixtures, communication systems components, and other ceiling-mounted items.

1 08 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Prepare record documents and marked-up drawings to indicate revisions made during the progress of the Work. Indicate the following installed conditions:

- Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control

devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located (i.e., traps, strainers, expansion joints, tanks, etc.). Valve location diagrams, complete with valve tag chart, refer to section,” Mechanical Identification”. Indicate actual inverts and horizontal locations of underground piping.

- Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines.

- Approved substitutions, Contract modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed.




B. Mark Specifications to indicate accepted substitutions; Change Orders;

actual equipment and materials installed. 1 09 MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Prepare maintenance manuals including the following information for

equipment items:

- Brief description of each system and piece of equipment with basic operating features. Include descriptive literature of equipment and components with manufacturer’s name, model number, and capacity rating. Include description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts.

- Manufacturer’s printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.

- Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting, disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.

- Servicing requirements and instructions. - Manufacturer’s list of general spare parts for every piece of

equipment, with unit prices. - Manufacturer’s list of recommended spare parts for one year of

operation for every piece of equipment, with unit prices. - Detailed and simplified one line, color, coded flow diagram of each

system with tag number, location and function of each valve and instrument.

- Detailed and simplified color coded as-installed wiring diagrams of motor controllers and automatic controls with tag number, location of each instrument and electrical device with description of sequence of operation and interlocks.

B. Provide six copies of the operation and maintenance instruction manuals

for the different mechanical systems, in bound booklet form.

C. Submit in draft form for review and approval prior to final issue and at least four weeks in advance of completion date of the system.

1 10 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Follow the procedures of” SUBMITTALS” specified in the contract conditions and the project general requirements.

B. Equipment and Materials Lists: Approximately 30 days after award of

Contract, submit lists of equipment and materials, with names of proposed manufacturers and drawings of interrelated items. All submissions are to show submission dates.

C. Samples: Submit to the Engineer for approval samples of materials as

requested. Samples of workmanship are also to be performed as required by the Engineer.

D. Manufacturers’ Literature: Submit manufacturers’ descriptive literature,

data sheets, and shop and installation drawings of equipment and




materials, showing type, arrangement, component parts, installation dimensions, operating clearances, weights, materials, construction, and performance information. The performance is to include capacities, rpm, bhp, pressure drop, design and operating pressure, temperatures, and similar data. Complete electrical data and characteristics, including power conditions, power requirements, motor, drive, testing information, and identifying types and numbers, are to be included. Where pertinent electrical diagrams are to be provided.

E. Submit manufacturer’s certified drawings, templates and installation

instructions for all equipment showing operating weights, weight distribution, location of vibration isolation mounts, size and location of anchor bolts, drainage and other openings, and other pertinent data to assist in design of bases and supports.

F. Mark clearly in ink catalogues, pamphlets and manufacturer’s

drawings for proper identification of item proposed and indicate, with reasons, deviations from the Specification and the Drawings.

G. Submit for approval in letters form materials not covered by drawings

e.g. pipes, fittings and incidentals giving ratings and names of manufacturers.

H. No equipment or materials are to be purchased or delivered to Site

until the required submittals have been approved.

I. Submit a listing of spare parts for all mechanical equipment, as recommended by the manufacturer, for keeping in stock, including sources of supply. Spare parts list shall be for two years and to be submitted with the bid documents.

J. During the progress of the work, submit shop drawings, to 1/20 or 1/10

scale, as required by the Engineer and as specified. 1 11 SUBSTITUTION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A. Reference to equipment or material by name, make or catalogue number and lists of approved manufacturers are to be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and performance and are not intended to eliminate equivalent products of other manufacturers.

B. Equipment Selection: Equipment of greater or larger power,

dimensions, capacities, and ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting mechanical and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, and equipment spaces are increased. No additional costs will be approved for these increases, if larger equipment is approved. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of the equipment are specified, the equipment must meet the design requirements and commissioning requirements.

1 12 EQUIPMENT NAME PLATES

Each piece of equipment is to have a conspicuous certified name plate, permanently attached at factory, printed or stamped with name of manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, date of manufacture, capacity, operating and power characteristics, performance rating or duty, pressure, temperature




or other limitations, labels of tested compliance, and similar essential data. Nameplates are to be in an accessible location.

1 13 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other building components and trades.

B. Arrange for slots and openings in building structure during progress of

construction to allow for mechanical installations. C. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and set

sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical

materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.

E. Coordinate connection of electrical services.

F. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior

underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies.

G. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors where

mechanical items requiring access are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and ’ doors are specified in General Requirements Section “Access Doors”.

H. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering

and painting where devices are applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices prior to installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

1 14 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES

A. Cooperate with other trades to permit their work to be installed satisfactorily and with minimum interference or delay.

B. Coordinate space requirements with other trades, where work will be

installed in close proximity to and may interfere with work of other trades. Coordinate space requirements in shafts, double partitions and hung ceilings.

C. Furnish to other trades templates, patterns, setting out plans and shop

details necessary for proper installation and coordination of adjacent work.

1 15 WARRANTIES

A. All work is to be guaranteed for a period of one year dated from the final acceptance of the work by the Owner unless specific components have longer warranty periods.

B. Repairs or replacements made under the guarantee shall bear an

additional of one year guarantee dated from the final acceptance of the




repair or replacement.

C. Provide complete warranty information for each item to include product or equipment; date of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names, addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services

.

D. The guarantee is to cover perfect mechanical operation of systems, acceptable noise and vibration levels, reasonable consumption of power, fuel and water.

E. If during the guarantee period any equipment or material proves

defective or any part of a system fails to function properly, equipment is to be replaced and defects and malfunctions corrected as directed by the Engineer.

F. If during the guarantee period any piece of equipment is replaced or

rebuilt,-the guarantee period for this equipment is to be extended for a new period equal to the original guarantee period.

G. During the guarantee period, provide necessary skills and labor to

assure proper operation and to provide regular and preventive maintenance for equipment and controls, on a continuous 24 hour basis.

H. Act promptly to correct problems arising in operation of equipment or

system.

I. Provide Owner with monthly inspection certificates of equipment, record findings on a checklist and certify that each piece of equipment has been examined, is operating as intended and has been maintained as by manufacture.

J. Spare parts for normal wear and tear during guarantee period are to be

provided by Contractor.

Part 2: Product

(Not Applicable) Part3: Execution 3 01 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model

numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification.

B. In addition to the specific requirements for delivery, storage, and

handling of materials and equipment specified in the respective sections, the following are general requirements that must be adhered to:

- Deliver and store materials and equipment in manufacturer’s original




packing, shipping containers, crating, shipping skids, etc. Avoid crushing or bending containers.

- Handle materials and equipment carefully to prevent damage, breakage, denting or scoring.

- Project stored materials and equipment from the weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris, and physical damage from construction traffic.

- When possible, store inside, under cover, and in a clean dry place. When not stored in original containers, separate and cover with clean dust proof sheet or polythene.

- Where necessary by manufacturer’s requirements, store materials and/or equipment at recommended temperatures and humilities to prevent damage.

- Where it is only possible to store outside, elevate above grade, and enclose with durable, water proof wrapping.

- Do not stack containers or store in such manner that may cause damage.

- Store equipment on level surface to prevent twisting. - Prevent contact with cement or lime. - Do not pack in straw unless delivered in this manner from

manufacturer - Comply with manufacturer’s rigging and installation instructions for

unloading and moving to final Location. - Do not install damaged materials or equipment, remove from Site

and replace with new. 3 02 ROUGH-IN

A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected.

B. Refer to equipment specifications in other Specification Section for rough-

in requirements. 3 03 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS

A. Coordinate mechanical equipment and materials installation with other building components, and other trades.

B. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.

C. Arrange for and provide templates or detailed dimensions for slots, and

openings in the floors, walls, partitions, and other building components, to allow for mechanical installations.

D. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to

be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. Provide supplemental steel required for supporting or hanging of mechanical equipment.

E. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical

materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building.

F. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to

accommodate the installation of mechanical equipment and materials.




G. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.

H. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance and

repair or replacement of equipment components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, using unions or flange connections, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location.

I. Coordinate the installation of mechanical materials and equipment

above ceilings with suspension system, light fixtures, and other installations.

J. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior

underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service.

K. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved

submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the Engineer.

L. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and

perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces. except where otherwise indicated.

M. Arrange for and provide templates or detailed dimensions for the

installation of access panels or doors where work is concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in identify access doors to indicate location of concealed work.

N. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to

piping systems required has to be installed at a specified slope. O. Provide all electrical field wiring between components of packaged

equipment shipped loose in accordance with the requirements of related section.

3 04 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent installations.

B. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and

materials required to: - Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. - Remove and replace defective Work. - Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the

Contract Documents. - Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. - Install equipment and materials in existing structures. - Upon written instructions from the Engineer, uncover and restore

Work to provide for Engineer observation of concealed Work.

C. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including but not limited to




removal of mechanical piping, heating units, plumbing fixtures and trim, and other mechanical items made obsolete by the new Work.

D. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not

indicated or scheduled to be removed.

E. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.

F. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new

materials matching existing materials and experienced Installers. Installers’ qualifications refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched.

G. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials

specified for the original installation and experienced Installers. Installers’ qualifications refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched.

H. Cut, , walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for

mechanical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of the trades involved.

I. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.

3 05 INSERTS AND SLEEVES

A. Refer to Section “PIPES AND PIPE FITT1NGS” for the installation of pipe sleeves.

B. Inserts in concrete for supports are to be as specified in section. C. Lay out the work in accordance with approved shop drawings. Furnish

and set in place, in advance of placing of slabs or construction of walls, all inserts and sleeves necessary complete the Work.

D. Pipe Sleeves: Unless otherwise indicated, pipe is to be of:

- General floor is to be standard weight galvanized steel i.e with bottom end flush with surface, calked with glass wool and sealed at top and bottom with butyl mastic. Top end is to extend 25 mm above floor level in mechanical rooms. Top end of sleeves is to be flush with finished floor surface in finished rooms.

- Sleeves in Foundation Walls: Cast iron fabricated sleeves, flush inside and outside, calked water tight.

- Sleeves in Concrete Walls: Standard weight galvanized steel pipe, flush with wall surface at both ends, calked with glass wool and sealed at both faces with butyl mastic.

- Sleeves in Interior Partitions and Ceilings: 20 gauge galvanized steel with lock joints.

- Sleeves for uninsulated piping are to be approximately 20 mm larger than pipe passing through. Sleeves for insulated piping are to be large enough to accommodate the full thickness of the pipe covering with clearance for expansion and contraction.

- Fire Rated Wall or Floor Sleeves - Galvanized Pipe: Annular space between pipe and sleeve in the fire rated wall or the fire rated floor is to be packed with fire rated silicone foam.

3 06 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS




A. All floor mounted equipment and apparatus are to be provided with necessary concrete pedestals, bases, pads, curbs and anchor blocks as shown or required. Provide anchor bolts, slab inserts, supports, cradles, saddles, hangers and sleeves as may be required or necessary for proper support or attachment to the building structure for all piping, conduit, equipment and apparatus.

B. Concrete pads are to be 100 mm high unless otherwise indicated, with

steel reinforcing and necessary bolts, anchors, etc. Where concrete pad is set directly on concrete floor, provide dowels in floor to tie base to floor. Coordinate size, locations, anchor bolts, etc.

C. Construct concrete equipment bases of dimensions indicated, but not

less than 100 mm larger than supported unit in both directions. Follow supported equipment manufacturer’s setting templates for anchor bolt and tie locations.

3 06 01 Erection Of Metal Supports And Anchorage

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Dl.l ”Structural Welding Code –

Steel”. 3 06 02 Grouting

A. Use nonshrink, non-metallic grout to ASTM C 1107, Grade B specifications - Characteristics: Post-hardening volume adjusting, dry, hydraulic-

cement grout, non -staining, non -corrosive, non gaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

- Design Mix: 34.50MPa, 28-day compressive strength. - Packaging: Premixed and factory-packaged.

B. Install nonmetallic non -shrink grout for mechanical equipment base

bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer’s printed instructions.

C. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. D. Provide forms for placement of grout, as required.

E. Avoid air entrapment when placing grout. F. Place grout to completely fill equipment bases. G. Place grout on concrete bases to provide a smooth bearing surface for

equipment. H. Place grout around anchors. I. Cure placed grout according to manufacturer’s printed instructions.

3 06 03 protection Of Work

A. Keep all pipe openings closed by means of plugs or caps to prevent the entrance of foreign matter, and cover all fixtures, equipment and




apparatus as required to protect them against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage both before and after installation.

B. Any fixtures, equipment or apparatus damaged prior to final acceptance

of the Work are to be restored to its original condition or replaced. 3 06 04 Electrical Equipment Room Precautions

A. No piping for water or sewage or any other piping systems not included as part of the electrical work will be allowed to be installed in any switch gear room, transformer vault, telephone room or electric closet.

B. In Mechanical Rooms, where piping runs over motor control centers or

other electrical equipment, provide a sheet metal shield or gutter. Submit shop drawings showing proposed shielding at each location.

3 06 05 Painting And Finishing

Damage and Touch Up: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3 06 06 Cleaning

Refer to Section, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for requirements for cleaning filters, strainers, and any system prior to final acceptance.

3 06 07 Initial Operation Of Systems

A. After installation is complete, operate systems for time required to complete specified Testing, and Adjusting, to demonstrate performance in accordance with design requirements and to provide instruction and training of Owner’s designated personnel.

B. Obtain approval of commencement date.

3 06 08 Noise And Vibration

A. Equipment is to operate without objectionable noise or vibration under all conditions of load. Noise and/or vibration noticeable outside a room in which moving equipment is installed, or annoyingly noticeable inside the room, will be considered objectionable.

B. Noise level resulting from equipment and heard in the same building or nearby buildings is not to exceed 40 decibels as measured with a standard sound level meter on the ’A’ scale.

C. Conditions considered objectionable are to be corrected by approved

means and as directed. D. Noise is to be corrected by the addition of sound attenuators in ducts,

internal duct lining, installation of sound barriers or dampeners on walls and/or ceilings of equipment rooms or by other method to produce satisfactory noise levels.

E. Vibration control is to be accomplished by the use of approved vibration

isolators applied and installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3 06 09 TrainIng




A. Instruct and train Owner’s designated personnel in the operation and maintenance of every part, device and piece of equipment in the systems, with emphasis on proper start-up and shut-down procedures, preventive maintenance and lubrication procedures with recommended lubricants, overhaul and maintenance methods, adjustment and calibration of instruments and controls, use of special tools and safe practices.

B. All expenses for training the Owner’s personnel are to be at Contractor’s own account.




Division 15 - Mechanical work

Section 15030 Electrical Requirements for Plumbing and

Fire Fighting Works


A. Project General Requirements Specification sections apply to work of this section.

B. Separate electrical components and materials required for field installation and

electrical connections are specified in the relevant section. 1 02 Scope of Work

A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for electrical components which are an integral part of packaged mechanical equipment. These components include, but are not limited to factory installed motors, starters, and disconnect switches furnished as an integral part of packaged mechanical equipment.

B. Specific electrical requirements (i.e. horsepower and electrical characteristics)

for mechanical equipment are specified within the individual equipment specification sections, or are shown on the drawings.

1 03 Codes and Standards

A. Electrical components of mechanical equipment to conform to the following codes and standards: NEMA Standards MG1: Motors and Generators

NEMA Standards ICS 2: Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies

NEMA Standard 250: Enclosed Switches

National Electrical Code (NFPA 70)

1 04 Submittals

No separate submittal is required. Submit product data for motors, starters, and other electrical components with submittal data required for the equipment for which it serves, as required by the individual equipment specification sections.

1 05 Quality Assurance

A. Electrical components and materials to be UL labeled.

MOTORS

A. The requirements specified in the paragraphs below are basic requirements for simple or common motors. For special motors, more detailed and




specific requirements are specified in the individual equipment specifications.

B. Torque Characteristics. to be sufficient to satisfactorily accelerate the

driven loads.

C. Motor Sizes to be large enough so that the driven load will not require the motor to operate in the service factor range.

D. 2-Speed Motors to have two separate windings on poly-phase motors.

E. Temperature Rating to be rated for 40 deg. C environment with maximum

50 deg. C temperature rise for continuous duty at full load (Class A insulation).

F. Starting Capability: Frequency of starts to be as indicated by automatic

control system. Frequency of starts to be not less than 5 evenly time-spaced starts per hour for manually controlled motors. Time delay starting requirements are specified in the individual equipment specifications.

G. Service Factor to be 1.15 for poly-phase motors and 1.35 for single phase

motors.

H. Motor Construction to be NEMA Standard No. 48 or 54. Use driven equipment manufacturer’s standards to suit specific application.

I. Frames: NEMA Standard No. 48 or 54. Use driven equipment

manufacturer’s standards to suit specific application.

J. Bearings to be ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals; re- greasable, except permanently sealed when motor is normally inaccessible for regular maintenance; and designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives produce lateral or axial thrust in motor. For fractional horsepower, light duty motors, sleeve type bearings are permitted.

K. Enclosure Type: To be open drip-proof motors for indoor use where

satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation; guarded drip-proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants; weather protected type I for outdoor use, and type II where not housed.

L. Overload Protection: To be built-in thermal overload protection and, where

indicated, internal sensing device suitable for signaling and stopping motor at starter.

M. Noise Rating: ”Quiet”.

N. Efficiency: ”Energy Efficient” motors to have a minimum efficiency as

scheduled in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, test method B. If efficiency than ” average standard industry motors:, in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, test method B.

O. Nameplate to indicate the full identification of manufacturer, ratings,

characteristics, construction, special features and similar information. STARTERS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES, AND WIRING

A. Motor Starter Enclosures to be NEMA 12, general purpose enclosures with

padlock ears, except in outdoor or wet locations where they are to be NEMA 3R with conduit hubs, or units in hazardous locations where they




are to have NEC proper class and division.

B. Type and Size of Motor Starter to be as recommended by motor manufacturer and the driven equipment manufacturer for applicable protection and start-up condition.

C. Manual Switches to have pilot lights and extra positions for multi-speed

motors.

D. Overload Protection to be provided.

E. Magnetic Starters to be maintained contact push buttons and pilot lights, properly arranged for single speed or multi-speed operation as indicated.

F. Trip-Free Thermal Overload Relays to be provided on each phase.

G. Interlocks, Pneumatic Switches and Similar Devices to be as required for

coordination with control requirements of Mechanical Specifications Building Management System section.

H. Built-in 120 Volts Control Circuit Transformer to be fused from line side,

where service exceeds 240 volts.

I. Externally Operated Manual Reset to be provided.

J. Under-Voltage Release Protection to be provided.

K. Motor Connections to be flexible conduit, except where plug-in electrical cords are specifically indicated.

1 06 Capacitors

A. Features: To be individual unit cells; all welded steel housing; each capacitor internally fused; non-flammable synthetic liquid impregnant; craft tissue insulation; and aluminum foil electrodes.

B. KVAR size to be as required to correct motor power factor to 90percent or

better. To be installed on all motors 1 horsepower and larger that have an uncorrected power factor of less than 85 percent at rated load.

1 07 Disconnect Switches

A. Fusible Switches to be fused, each phase; general duty; horsepower rated; quick-make, quick-break mechanism; dead front line side shield; solderless lugs suitable for copper or aluminum conductors; spring reinforced fuse clips; electro silver plated current carrying parts; hinged doors; operating lever arranged for locking in the ”OPEN” position; arc quenchers; capacity and characteristics as indicated.

B. Non-Fusible Switches to be for equipment 2 horsepower and smaller; to be

horsepower rated; toggle switch type; quantity of poles and voltage rating as indicated. For equipment larger than 2 horsepower, switches to be the same as fusible type.

1 08 Variable Frequency Drive

A. Furnish complete variable frequency drives as specified herein for the pumps designated to be variable speed. All standards and optional features




shall be included within the VFD enclosure, unless otherwise specified. VFD enclosure shall be NEMA MC 1 with inlet air filters. Drive shall be mounted on a floor stand.

B. The VFD shall convert three-phase, 50 hertz utility power to adjustable

voltage and frequency, three phase power for stepless motor speed control from 10% to 100% of the motor’s 50 hertz speed. Input voltage shall be as specified on the drawing schedules.

C. The VFD shall include a converter and an inverter section. The converter

section shall convert fixed frequency and voltage AC utility power to DC voltage. All VFDs shall include input line reactors or an isolation transformer as required.

D. The inverter section of the VFD shall invert the DC voltage into aquality

output wave-form, with adjustable voltage and frequency for stepless motor speed control. The VFD shall maintain a constant V/Hz ratio.

E. The VFD and options shall be tested to ANSI/UL.508. The complete drive,

including all specified options, shall be listed by a nationally recognized testing agency such as UL or ETL.

F. Power line noise shall be limited to a voltage distortion factor and line

notch as defined in IEEE 519 1981 Edition ”Guide for Harmonic Control and Reactive Compensation of Static Power Converters”. The total voltage distortion shall not exceed 5 percent.

G. The VFD shall not emit radiated RFI in excess of the limitations set forth

in the FCC Rules and Regulations, FCC Part 15 for Class A computing devices. The VFD shall carry a FCC compliance label. PWM type drives shall include RFI filters.

H. Motor noise as a result of the VFD shall be limited to 3 db over across the

line operation, measured at 1 meter from the motor’s centre line.

I. The VFD’s full load amp rating shall meet or exceed NFPA 70, NEC Table 430-150.

J. Protective Features: K. Individual motor overload protection for each motor controlled.

- Protection against input power under-voltage, over-voltage, and phase loss. - Protection against output current overload and instantaneous overcurrent. - Protection against over-temperature within the VFD enclosure. - Protection against over-voltage on the DC bus. - Protect VFD from sustained power of phase loss. Under-voltage trip

activates automatically when line voltage drops more than10 percent below rated input voltage.

- Automatically reset faults due to under-voltage, over-voltage, phase loss, or over-temperature.

- Protection against output short circuit and motor winding - shorting to case faults, as defined by UL 508. - Status lights or digital for indication of individual fault conditions. - Controller capable of operating without a motor or any other equipment

connected to the drive output to facilitate start up and troubleshooting. - Input line reactors shall be provided to minimize harmonics introduced to

the AC line and to provide additional protection to AC line transients.

L. Interface Features:

- Door mounted Hand/Off/Auto selector switch to start and stop the VFD. In the Auto position, the VFD will start/stop from the controller. In the Hand




position, the VFD will run regardless of the remote contact position. - Manual speed control capability. - Local/Remote selector switch. In the Remote position, motor speed is

determined by the follower signal. In the local position, motor speed is determined by the manual speed control.

- Power/On light to indicate that the VFD has tripped on a fault condition. - Digital meter with se]ector switch to indicate percent speed and percent

load. - A set of form-C, dry contacts to indicate when the VFD is in the Run mode. - A set of form-C, dry contacts to indicate when the VFD is in the Fault mode. - A 0 to 10 Vdc output signal to vary in direct proportion to the controller’s

speed. - VFD to have terminal strip and N.C. safety contacts such as freezstats,

smoke alarms, etc. VFD to safety shut down in drive or bypass mode when contacts open.

M. Adjustments:

- Maximum speed, adjustable 15 to 100 percent base speed. - Acceleration time, adjustable 3 to 60 seconds. - Deceleration time, adjustable 3 to 60 seconds with override circuit to

prevent nuisance trips if decal time is set too short. - Current limit, adjustable 0 to 105 percent. - Overload trip set point. - Offset and gain to condition the input speed signal.

N. Service Conditions:

- Ambient temperature, 0 to 50 degrees C. - 0 to 95 percent relative humidity, non condensing. - Elevation to 3,300 feet (1,000 meters) without derating. - AC line voltage variation, -10 to +10 percent of nominal.

O. Special Features: The following special features shall be included in the

VFD enclosure. The unit shall maintain its UL to ETL listing.

- Manual by-pass shall provide all the circuitry necessary to transfer the motor from the VFD to the power line, or from the line to the controller. The by-pass circuitry shall be mounted in a separate section section of the VFD enclosure. Motor overload protection shall beprovided in both drive and by-pass modes.

- A door interlocked, pad locakble drive disconnect switch shall be provided to disconnect power from the VFD only (the disconnect shall be clearly marked as such).

- A motor circuit protector, MCP, shall be provided as a means of disconnecting all power to both the VFD and by-pass circuits as well as provided short circuit and locked rotor protection to the motor while in the by-pass mode.

- The disconnect and by-pass functions may be accomplished via disconnects, contractors and overloads, or with a four position Drive/Off/Line/Test switch with motor starter and by-pass.

P. Quality Assurance:

- To ensure quality and minimize infantile failures at the job site, the

complete VFD shall be tested by the manufacturer. The VFD shall operate a dynamometer at full load and the load and speed shall be cycled during the test.

- All optional features shall be functionally tested at the factory for proper operation.

Q. Submittals:




- Submit manufacturer’s performance data including dimensional drawings,

customer connection drawings, power circuit diagrams, installation and maintenance manuals, warranty description, VFDs FLA rating, certification agency file numbers and catalogue information.




Division 15 - Mechanical Work Section 15040 - Builders Work For Plumbing And Fire Fighting


Project general requirements specification sections apply to work of this section.

1 02 Scope of Work

A. Builder’s Work in connection with all mechanical works such as equipment bases and supports, cutting and patching of walls and slabs for passage of pipes, repatching, fixing of pipe hangers and supports to structures, excavation and backfilling, scaffolding, rigging, hoisting, waterproofing, cleaning and painting are to be provided as specified under this Section.

B. Materials are to conform to requirements included in of the Specification.

PART 2: PRODUCTS 2 01 Sundries

A. Pipe Sleeves for pipes passing through walls, floors and roof to be galvanized steel pipe, two nominal pipe sizes larger than pipe passing through for bare pipes, and of sufficient size to permit pipe insulation to pass through for insulated pipes.

B. Escutcheon Plates to be nickel plated, split ring type, sized to match pipe

that it is to conceal. Plates for pipes passing through sleeves which extend above floor surfaces to be deep recessed type to conceal sleeve.

C. Flashing Sleeves: coated cast iron, caulking type, size specifically to fit

pipe and as manufactured by Josam, No. 1840 or approved equal.

D. Hangers And Supports Fasteners: power driven masonry expansion bolts with steel threaded studs or internally threaded studs and couplings as required.

Part 3: Execution 3 01 Excavation

Excavate And Backfill as necessary, including shoring, sheet piling. bracing, pumping, restoring and protection of persons and property.

3 02 Equipment Bases and Supports

A. Shop Drawings: submit for approval showing dimensions, arrangement and size of reinforcement and locations of anchor bolts.




B. Foundations For Rotating And Reciprocating Equipment at ground level

to be carried independently to solid ground or rock and isolated from floor slab with 50 mm thick layer of cork board and mastic filler to prevent transmission of vibration.

C. Equipment On Intermediate Floors Or Roof: mount on its support on

vibration is olators. Alternatively, support is to include substantial layer of corkboard between it and structure to reduce transmission of vibration to a minimum.

D. Vibration Isolation Mounts: position in accordance with weight

distribution of equipment and as recommended by manufacturer of equipment or mounts. Secure embedded mounts during concreting.

E. Align And Level Equipment on bases and supports over entire length

and width and shim where necessary to facilitate levelling.

F. Concrete Bases And Supports to be 150 mm larger all around than equipment, of height to suit equipment and with top edge chamfered. Plaster andpaint or finish as adjacent and surrounding flooring.

G. Anchor Bolts: set in oversized sleeves with washers and nuts at

bottom. Bolts to project at least 6 mm above nuts when equipment is fixed to allow for shimming. Secure during concreting.

H. Suspended Cradles And Wall Brackets: test to sustain a load eight

times actual operating weight of equipment supported. 3 03 Hangers and Supports

A. FASTENERS: install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Fasteners to penetrate 6 to 8 times shank diameter. 2. Embedded Attachments: fix during concreting. 3. Test fasteners in ceilings and walls to sustain a load eight times

operating weight of piping, or equipment supported.

B. Additional Framing: provide where structure is inadequate to give suitable support. Design is to be approved.

3 04 Pipes Passing Through Walls and Slabs

A. Structural Members: do not cut without approval. Any approved cutting to be done only as directed.

B. Sleeves to be provided for all pipes passing through walls, floors and

roofs. Locate before walls etc. are constructed and fasten securely to prevent displacement during construction. Plug ends during construction.

C. Sleeves to terminate flush with finished walls and ceilings and to

project 20 mm above finished floors and 250 mm above rough concrete of roof.

D. Escutcheon Plates to be provided for all exposed uninsulated pipes

passing through walls, floors and ceilings. 3 05 Joinery




A. Access Doors: provide in false ceilings, walls or other construction to

permit access to equipment, controls, etc. requiring periodic operation, inspection or maintenance.

3 06 Water Proofing

A. Openings In External Walls, Roofs And Walls Below Ground to be made watertight with sleeves, caulking, caulking fittings and flashings. Openings in external walls, particularly at and below ground level and in roofs to be plugged and caulked with oakum and lead between pipe and sleeve.

B. Waterproofed Construction: method of installing workpiercing

waterproofed construction to be subject to review and approval. C. Pipes through Roofs to be further waterproofed with metal flashing

fixed to pipe with flashing sleeve and extended under roof waterproofing membrane 300 mm all round.

3 07 Cleaning and Painting

A. Clean equipment, material, piping etc. inside and outside by effective and approved methods to remove loose mill scale, blisters, sand, plaster, paint droppings. debris, dirt, oil, grease, labels and all foreign matter. Clean and brush work in stages as directed before painting or concealing.

B. Surfaces To Be Painted: clean with wire brush and cleaning solution.

Do not apply paint to wet or damp surfaces.

C. Black Steel Piping including flanges, bolts, nuts, cast iron valves and accessories, valve wheels and all ferrous parts are to be painted with two coats of zinc chromate primer whether or not they are to be insulated. When bare or exposed to view, they are to be further painted with two coats of approved oil paint.

D. Piping: when directed by the Engineer piping in machine room is to be

painted to conform to ASME Color Co. All the pipes to show, sizes and direction of flow. Insulated pipes to be color coded and stencilled over the external jacket.

E. Hangers And Supports including clamps, rods, bolts, nuts etc. to be

painted with two coats of zinc chromate primer and where exposed to view with two additional coats of approved oil paint.

F. Damaged Surfaces of equipment to be restored to original condition by

cleaning and painting as directed.

G. Unfinished Surfaces to be painted as directed.

H. Hot Surfaces to be painted with approved heat resistant paint.

I. Apply paint in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.




Division 15 - Mechanical Work Section 15060 - Pipes and Pipe Fittings Part 1: General 1 01 Related Documents

Drawings and project general provisions of Contract, including General and the Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1 02 Summary

A. This Section includes the piping materials and installation methods

common to most piping systems.

B. Types of pipes and pipe fittings specified in this section include the following: Seamless Black Steel Pipe and Fittings for Fire Fighting Works UPVC Pipe and Fittings for Drainage System CPVC Pipe and Fittings for Cold and Hot Water System Polypropylene. Pipe and Fittings for Cold and Hot Water System Galvanized Steel Pipe and Fittings for External Water Supply Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings

C. Pipe and pipe fittings used for the different piping systems are

specified in the respective piping system sections.

D. Labeling and identifying mechanical systems and equipment is specified in Section ”MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION”.


A. Qualify welding processes and operators for structural steel according to AWS Dl.l ”Structural Welding Code – Steel”.

B. Qualify welding processes and operators for piping according to

ASME Section IX, ”Welding and Brazing Qualifications”. - Comply with provisions of ASME B31 Series ”Code for Pressure

Piping”. - Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for the

welding processes involved and that certification is current.

C. Submit welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified above.

1 04 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

A. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above

grade. When stored inside, do not exceed structural capacity of the floor.

B. Protect flanges and fittings from moisture and dirt, by inside storage

and enclosure, or by packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping.

C. Protect stored plastic pipes from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.




1 05 Submittals

A. Provide stress analysis calculations with the piping shop drawings for all pipes above 200 minimum diameter showing anchor points and pipe guides.

Part 2: Product 2 01 Pipe and Pipe Fittings

A. Steel Pipe and Fittings - Galvanizing on galvanized steel pipes to be tested to BS 1387

Appendix A.

- Grooved Pipe: Carbon Steel, A-53B/A-106B/A-120. Roll grooved for size up to and including 100 mm pipes and roll or cut grooved ends as appropriate to pipe material, wall thickness, pressure, size and method of jointing. Tools to secure piping, couplings and fittings must be made by the same manufacturer to ensure compatibility.

- Steel Pipe: BS 1387, medium class, medium, black seamless steel pipe are threaded for pipes less than and up to 50 mm, above 50 mm to be roll grooved up to 150 mm and cut grooved for pipe above 150 mm, grooved ends suitable for mechanical couplings. BS 3601, seam-less, black steel pipe, cut grooved ends suitable for mechanical coupl-ings ends for pipes above 200 mm, Schedule 40. And schedule 80 for pipe sections with a static head of 50 m or more.

- Fire Piping: black seamless steel shall be joined by a mechanical coupling.

- Elbows to be long radius type. - Pipe unions on threaded pipes 50 mm diameter and under to have

female threaded ends and ground metal to metal seats. Unions to be of same manufacture, pressure class, and material as other pipe fittings.

- Flanges are to be of same pressure rating, facing, drilling and thickness as mating flanges on valves, accessories and equipment.

- Flanges on black steel pipes to be black, forged steel, slip-on or weld neck type.

- Flanges on galvanized steel pipes to be galvanized steel, threaded type.

- Any pipes or portions of pipes subjected to a static head of 50 m or more shall be schedule 80 pipe built to 2070 kPa psi rating.

B. CPVC and uPVC Pipe and Fittings

- To BS 5255 for 32 mm, 40 mm and 50 mm pipes, to BS 4514 for 82

mm, 110 mm and 160 mm pipes installed above ground, to BS 4660 for 110 mm and 160 mm pipes installed below ground and to BS 3506 for 200 mm pipes and above.

- Fittings for UPVC pipe to be couplers or mechanical joints with rubber sealing rings.

- Pressure PVC pipe: to BS 3505 Class E. - Pressure PVC fittings: integral parallel sockets with solvent welded

joints for pipes up to 65 mm, and couplers with rubber sealing rings for pipes 82 mm and larger.




- Sealing rings on PVC pipes to provide for expansion and contraction to be rubber to BS 2494 Part 2.

C. Polypropylene Pipes and Fittings

- Type 3, PN 25 to DIN 8077 and 8078. - Fittings for polypropylene pipe to be welded and threaded type for

connection to threaded valves to DIN 16962. 2 02 Joining Materials

A. Refer to individual piping system specification Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Grooved Pipe Jointing: Pipes shall be joined via grooved coupling(Victaulic Style 07 Zero Flex or approved equal) with angle pad design Victaulic style 77 or 75 shall be used where system flexibility is required at pumps, and mechanical equipment to reduce vibration, noise and to accommodate for thermal expansion and contraction. All couplings shall be cast of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12 or malleable iron conforming to ASTM A-47 Grade 32510. Housing shall be enamel coated or hot dip galvanized

C. Pipe Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for the chemical and thermal conditions of the piping system contents.

D. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, or BS 4190, carbon steel,

except where other material is indicated, of length to allow nuts to utilize full length of bolt thread plus 6 mm.

Part 3: Execution 3 01 Piping Systems Installation – Common Requirements

A. General: Install piping as described below, except where system Sections specify otherwise. Individual piping system specification Sections specify piping installation requirements unique to the piping system.

B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematic.,

and diagrams) indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated, except where deviations to layout are approved on shop and co-ordination drawings.

C. Install vertical piping plumb.

D. Install horizontal piping at indicated uniform slope.

E. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than

system operating pressure.

F. Install piping in concealed interior and exterior locations except in equipment rooms and service areas.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.




H. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited, except where indicated.

I. Install piping close to slabs beams joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 1-inch (25mm)

clearance around insulation.

K. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.

L. Leave adequate clearance between pipes and adjacent pipes, walls,

ceilings and columns for making joints properly, easy installation and removal of valves and accessories and proper installation of insulation and individual pipe hangers and supports.

M. Install concealed piping to permit easy accessibility for maintenance

and repair, particularly of valves, vents. drains and other accessories.

N. Use eccentric reducers where appropriate to avoid air pockets, with flat of reducer on top on water piping to permit proper venting of system.

O. Install piping to permit free expansion and contraction without

damage to piping or structure. Provide adequate offsets and changes of direction to accomplish this and on long runs provide expansion loops.

P. Where pipe loops or changes in direction cannot be employed to

absorb thermal movement provide expansion joints. Where expansion joints are used, give consideration to anchoring and guiding pipes for controlled expansion and contraction. Follow instructions of manufacturer.

Q. Do not paint, cover or enclose piping until it is tested, inspected and

approved. R. Provide pipe unions or flanges at adequate intervals in piping to

permit easy disassembly, and at connections to equipment, near valves, controls, strainers and other accessories requiring removal.

S. Make changes in direction and size, branching and jointing of pipes

with regular pipe fittings. Do not bend pipe.

T. Do not use field fabricated fittings, bushings, close nipples and street elbows.

U. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect

piping materials of dissimilar metals. Use unions on threaded piping and flanges on welded piping.

V. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to

connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

W. Join pipes and fittings of the different materials specified as described below. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.




X. All water system piping with 50 m static head or more shall be black steel and have all piping, pipe accessories and components including connections and valves built to 300 psi rating.

3 02 Piping Connections To Equipment

A. Make connections to moving equipment through flexible

connections. Provide shut-off valves on both sides of equipment. Make any reductions in pipe size at equipment connections with all pipe accessories and piping specialties remaining same size as pipe runs.

B. Arrange piping connections to equipment such as to permit easy

removal of equipment without disturbing piping and without interference with the piping.

C. Except as otherwise indicated, make piping connections as

specified below.

- Install unions in piping 50 mm and smaller adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment having a 50 mm or smaller threaded pipe connection.

- Install flanges in piping 65 mm and larger adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment having flanged pipe connection.

3 03 Steel Pipe Joints

A. Joints in black steel pipes 50-mm diameter and under to be threaded and in pipes over 50-mm diameter to be mechanical coupling.

B. Joints in galvanized steel pipes of all sizes to be coupled.

C. Use Victaulic type valves where mechanical couplings are use in

piping system.

D. Threaded Joints Thread pipe to British Standard Taper Pipe Thread. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

- Cut pipes square and to exact length with a hacksaw. - Ream cut ends of pipes and tubes with a special tool to full inside

diameter and remove burrs. - Bevel cut plain ends of steel pipe. - Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and

proximity of internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.

- Apply Teflon tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. - Align threads at point of assembly. - Make up threaded joints tight close to shoulder of male thread. - Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe

is being threaded. - Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings having threads

that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

E. Threaded Joints Thread pipe to British Standard Taper Pipe Thread.

Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe




ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter.

F. Flanged Joints: Execute flanged joints as follows: 1. Align flange surfaces parallel and perfectly square with pipe. 2. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for

service application.

3. Install gasket concentric pos.

4. by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible.

5. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. 6. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using torque wrench.

3 04 Cleaning

A. Clean equipment, materials and piping on inside and outside from

loose mill scale, blisters, sand, plaster, paint droppings, dirt, oil, grease, labels and all foreign matter.

B. Wire brush piping on outside before painting or covering.

C. Clean water systems after completing each section by flushing

pipes, fittings, valves and accessories internally with clean water.

D. Clean air or gas systems after completing each section by blowing pipes, fittings, valves and accessories internally with compressed air.

3 05 CROSS-OVER PLATFORMS OR BRIDGES AND

STAIRS

A. Provide cross-over platforms or bridges and stairs for crossing piping on roof in co-ordination with the architect and structural Engineer.

B. Layout and construction to meet the intent of protecting the piping

from being stepped on or leaned against. Cross-overs shall not be attached to piping.




Division 15 - Mechanical Work Section 15100 - Valves Part 1: General 1 01 Related Documents

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions of the project Specification sections, apply to this section.

1 02 Summary

A. This Section includes general duty valves common to most plumbing and fire fighting mechanical piping systems.

- Special purpose valves are specified in individual piping system

specifications.

B. Valve tags and charts are specified in Section ”Mechanical Identification”.

1 03 Submittals

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and General Requirement Specification Sections.

B. Product data, including body material, valve design, pressure and

temperature classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions.


A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide valves of same type by same manufacturer. Comply with the requirements specified in the specification.

B. Provide valves with manufacturer’s name and pressure rating clearly

marked on valve body. C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Compliance: Comply

with ASME B31.9 for building services piping and ASME B31.1 for power piping.

D. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry

(MSS) Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard Practices reference.

1 05 Delivery, Storage, And Handling

A. Preparation For Transport: Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

- Ensure valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion.

- Protect valve ends against damage to threads, flange faces, and weld-end preps.

- Set valves in best position for handling. Set globe and gate valves




closed to prevent rattling; set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces; set butterfly valves closed or slightly open; and block swing check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Storage: Use the following precautions during storage:

- Do not remove valve end protectors unless necessary for inspection;

then reinstall for storage. - Protect valves from weather. Store valves indoors. Maintain valve

temperature higher than the ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, support valves off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures.

C. Handling: Use a sling to handle valves whose size requires handling by

crane or lift. Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed valve parts. Do not use hand wheels and stems as lifting or rigging points.

Part 2: Product 2 01 Manufacturers

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the followings:

- Gate, Globe, Double regulating, and Ball valves:

1. Crane Company (U.K) 2. Jenkins Valves, (U.S.A) 3. Hattersly (U.K) 4. Fabri Valve (ITALY). 5. Approved Equal

- Dynamic Balancing Valve: 1. Frese; 2. Bell and Gossett; 3. Griswold; and 4. Autoflow. 5. Approved Equal

2 02 Valve Features, General

A. Valve Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems.

- Nonrising stem valves may be used where headroom prevents full extension of rising stems.

B. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As scheduled and required to suit

system pressures and temperatures. C. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated. D. Operators: Provide the following special operator features:

- Hand wheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter

turn. - Lever handles, on quarter-turn valves 150 mm and smaller, except for

plug valves. Provide plug valves with square heads; provide one




wrench for every 10 plug valves. - Chain-wheel operators, for valves 65 mm and larger, installed 1.8 m

or higher above finished floor elevation. Extend chains to an elevation of 1.5 m above finished floor elevation.

- Gear drive operators, on quarter-turn valves 200 mm and larger.

E. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems arranged to receive insulation.

F. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain

connections. G. End Connections: As indicated in the valve specifications.

- Threads: British Standard Taper Pipe Thread. - Flanges: Comply with ANSI B16.1 for cast iron, ANSI B16.5 for steel,

and ANSI B16.24 for bronze valves. - Solder-Joint: Comply with ANSI B16.18.

a. Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having

a melting point below 450 0C for gate, globe, and check valves; below 216 0C for ball valves.

2 03 Gate Valves

A. Gate Valves, 50 mm and Smaller: MSS SP-80; PN 10, body and bonnet of ASTM B 62 cast bronze; with threaded or solder ends, solid disc, copper-silicon alloy stem, brass packing gland, ”Teflon” impregnated packing, and malleable iron hand wheel. Provide PN 16 valves meeting the above where system pressure require.

B. Gate Valves, 50 mm and Smaller: MSS SP-80; PN 10, body and union

bonnet of ASTM B 62 cast bronze; with threaded or solder ends, solid disc, copper- silicon alloy stem, brass packing gland, ”Teflon” impregnated packing, and malleable iron hand wheel. Do not use solder end valves for hot water heating applications. Provide PN 16 valves where system pressure require.

C. Gate Valves, 65 mm and Larger: MSS SP-70; PN 10 iron body, bronze

mounted, with body and bonnet conforming to ASTM A 126 Class B; with flanged ends, ”Teflon” impregnated packing, and two-piece backing gland assembly. Provide PN 16 valves where system pressure require.

2 04 Ball Valves

A. Ball Valves, 25 mm and Smaller: rated for 1030 kPa saturated steam pressure, 2760 kPa WOG pressure; two-piece construction; with bronze body conforming to ASTM B 62, standard (or regular) port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable ”Teflon” or ”TFE” seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide solder ends for condenser and chilled water; threaded ends for heating hot water . Provide PN 16 valves where system pressure require.

B. Ball Valves, 32 mm to 50 mm: rated for 1030 kPa saturated steam

pressure, 2760 kPa WOG pressure; 3 piece construction; with bronze body conforming to ASTM B 62, conventional port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable ”Teflon” or ”TFE” seats and seals, blowout proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide solder ends for condenser and chilled water; threaded ends for heating hot water and low-pressure steam.




Provide PN 16 valves where system pressure require. 2 05 Plug Valves

A. Plug Valves, 50 mm and Smaller: Rated at 1035 kPa WOG; bronze body, with straightaway pattern, square head, and threaded ends. Provide PN16valves where system pressure require.

B. Plug Valves, 65 mm and Larger: MSS SP-78; rated at 1200 kPa WOG;

lubricated plug type, with semi steel body, single gland, wrench operated, and flanged ends.

2 06 Globe Valves

A. Globe Valves, 50 mm and Smaller: MSS SP-80; PN 10; body and screwed bonnet of ASTM B 62 cast bronze; with threaded or solder ends, brass or replaceable composition disc, copper-silicon alloy stem, brass packing gland, “Teflon” impregnated packing, and malleable iron hand wheel. Provide PN 16 valves meeting the above where system pressure requires.

B. Globe Valves, 65 mm and Larger: MSS SP-85; PN 10 iron body and bolted

bonnet conforming to ASTM A 126, Class B; with outside screw and yoke, bronze mounted, flanged ends, and ”Teflon” impregnated packing, and two- piece backing gland assembly. Provide PN 16 valves where system pressure require.

2 07 Butter Fly Valves

A. Butterfly Valves, 65 mm and Larger: MSS SP-67; rated at 1380 kPa; cast-iron body conforming to ASTM A 126, Class B. Provide valves with field replaceable sleeve, nickel-plated ductile iron disc (except aluminum bronze disc for valves installed in condenser water piping), stainless stem, and EPDM O-ring seals. Provide lever operator with locks for sizes 50 mm through 150 mm and gear operators with position indicator for sizes 200 mm through 600 mm. Provide lug or water type as indicated. Drill and tap valves on dead end service or requiring additional body strength. Provide PN 16 valves where system pressures require.

2 08 Check Valves

A. Swing Check Valves, 50 mm and Smaller: MSS SP-80; PN 10, cast-bronze body and cap conforming to ASTM B 62; with horizontal swing, Y-pattern. and bronze disc; and having threaded or solder ends. Provide valves capable of being reground while the valve remains in the line. Provide Class 225 valves meeting the above specifications. with threaded end connections, where system pressure requires or where Class 125 valves are not available.

B. Wafer Check Valves: PN 16, cast-iron body; with replaceable bronze seat,

and non-slam design lapped and balanced twin bronze flappers and stainless steel trim and torsion spring. Provide valves designed to open and close at approximately one foot differential pressure. Provide valves where system pressure require.

C. Lift Check Valves, 50 mm and Smaller: PN 10; cast-bronze body and cap

conforming to ASTM B 62; horizontal or angle pattern, lift-type valve, with stainless steel spring, bronze disc holder with renewable “Teflon” disc, and threaded ends. Provide valves capable of being refitted and ground while the




valve remains in the line. Provide valves where system pressures require. 2 09 Commissioning Valves

A. Commissioning valves shall be combined gate, balancing with flow metering station having integral square-edge orifice plate fitted with a pair of pressure test plugs. Commissioning valves shall be as gate and balancing specification stated herein before and shall be of equivalent pressure ratings and manufacture.

2 10 Dynamic Balancing Valves

A. Automatic Flow Control Valve, pressure independent Type, +/- 5 percent accuracy. Stainless steel SS 304 Pre-installed replaceable flow rate cartridge, two P/T ports for flow and temperature readings. Valve size shall match pipe size. Refer to drawing for flow and pressure reading.

B. Up to 40 mm: hot forged brass body with female threaded ends, with

Stainless steel SS 304 Pre-installed replaceable flow rate cartridge, and P/T plugs for flow and temperature readings.

C. 50 mm and larger: gray iron body, flanged type with Stainless steel SS 304

Pre-installed replaceable high flow rate cartridge, two P/T ports for flow and temperature readings and the valve shall be bear media temperature –20 oC to 120 oC.

2 11 Triple Duty Valves

A. Triple duty valves shall be combined gate, balancing and check valves. Triple duty valves Specifications shall be as gate, balancing, check Specifications stated herein before and shall be of equivalent pressure ratings..

Part 3: Execution 3 01 Examination

A. Examine valve interior through the end ports for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Actuate valve through an open-close and close-open cycle. Examine

functionally significant features, such as guides and seats made accessible by such actuation. Following examination, return the valve closure member to the shipping position.

C. Examine threads on both the valve and the mating pipe for form (i.e., out-of-

round or local indentation) and cleanliness. D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage.

Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size, material composition suitable for service, and freedom from defects and damage.

E. Prior to valve installation, examine the piping for cleanliness, freedom from

foreign materials, and proper alignment. F. Replace defective valves with new valves.




3 02 Valve Ends Selection

A. Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections: - Steel Pipe Sizes, 50 mm and Smaller: threaded. - Steel Pipe Sizes 65 mm and Larger flanged.

3 03 Valve Installations

A. General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shut-off duty; globe, ball, and butterfly for throttling duty. Refer to piping system specification sections for specific valve applications and arrangements.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where

necessary. C. Install valves and unions for item of equipment arranged to allow

equipment removal without system shutdown. Unions are not required on flanged devices.

D. Install three-valve bypass around each pressure reducing valve using throttling- type valves.

E. Provide manual drain valves at all low points of water piping systems

whether shown on the Drawings or not. Drain valves to be gate, ball, or globe valves.

F. Provide manual or automatic air vents at all high points of water piping

systems. Manual vent valves to be of the gate or globe type. G. Provide isolating valves on all water piping system branches. Isolating

valves to be gate, ball or butterfly type. H. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:

- Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge

pin level. - Wafer Check Valves: Horizontal or vertical position,

between flanges. - Lift Check Valve: With stem upright and plumb.

I. Provide PN 16 or higher valves on pipes, systems or parts of systems with 50

m or more of static head. 3 04 Threaded Connections

A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends, and proximity of valve internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve. To avoid damage to valve seat do not screw pipe too far into valve.

B. Align threads at point of assembly. C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads

(except where dry seal threading is specified). D. Exercise great care in installing threaded valves to avoid straining valve

body. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded. When attaching pipe to valve in place, use second wrench to hold valve while pipe is being tightened.




3 05 Flanged Connections

A. Align flange surfaces parallel. B. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of

flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricant son bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench.

C. For dead-end service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and downstream for proper shutoff and retention.

3 06 Field Quality Control

A. Tests: After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final adjusting and balancing, inspect valves for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks; replace valves if leak persists.

3 07 Adjusting And Cleaning

A. Cleaning: Clean mill scale, grease, and protective coatings from exterior of valves and prepare valves to receive finish painting or insulation.

3 08 Testing and Balancing

A. Hydrostatic Testing: test all Valves for period of 2 hours, at not less than 1380 kPa or at 345 kPa in excess of maximum static pressure when maximum static pressure is in excess of 1030 kPa. Check system for leakage of joints. Measure hydrostatic pressure at low point of each system or zone being tested.




Division 15- Mechanical Work Section 15120 - Piping Specialties Part 1: General 1 01 Related Documents

Drawing and project general provisions of Contract, including General and the Supplementary Conditions Sections, of the project apply to this Section.

1 02 Summary

A. This Section includes the following piping specialties common to most mechanical piping systems:

Strainers Dielectric insulated unions and flanges Vacuum breakers Water hammer arrestor Escutcheon plates Pipe sleeves Mechanical sleeve seals Fire barrier penetration seals Flashing sleeves Drip pans Masonry bolts

B. Piping specialties furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment are

specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division- 15 sections.

C. Pipe expansion joints and flexible pipe connectors are specified in other specification sections.

Part 2: Product 2 01 PIPING SPECIALTIES – GENERAL

A. Provide factory-fabricated piping specialties recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated.

B. Provide piping specialties of types and pressure ratings indicated for each service, or if not indicated, provide proper selection to comply with installation requirements.

C. Provide sizes as indicated, and connections which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is Contractor’s option.

D. Piping specialties that fit in the line such as strainers, flexible connections,

expansion joints, dielectric unions and flanges, etc. are to be same size as pipe run.

2 02 STRAINERS

A. Provide on high pressure side of pressure reducing valves, on suction side of pumps, on inlet side of indicating and control instruments and equipment




subject to sediment damage and where shown on drawings. Strainer element shall be removable without disconnection of piping.

B. Strainers, 50 mm and Smaller: Screwed, Y-type, bronze body, 2070 kPa working pressure rating, with 20 mesh stainless steel screen, screwed cap and 15 mm diameter tapped hole for blowdown valve.

C. Strainers, 65 mm and Larger: Flanged, basket type, cast iron body,2070kPa

steam working pressure rating, with 20 mesh stainless steel basket screen, bolted cap and 20 mm diameter tapped hole at bottom for blowdown valve.

D. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide strainers

from one of the following manufacturers:

- Crane Co. (U.S.A.) or (U.K.) - Newman-Hattersley (U.K.) - Braukmann (Gemany) - Sarco (U.S.A.) - Approved equal

2 03 Dielectric Insulated Unions and Flanges

A. Dielectric Insulated Unions and Flanges: Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion.

- Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded,

solder, plain, and weld neck end types and matching piping system materials.

- Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

- Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly for (1725kPa) minimum working pressure at a (82 deg C) temperature.

- Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly for (1035kPa or 2070kPa) minimum pressure to suit system pressures.

- Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled, companion-flange

assembly, full-face or ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.

B. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for (1035kPa or

2070kPa) minimum working pressure to suit system pressures.

C. Dielectric Insulated Unions and Flanges: Suitable for temperature, pressure and all other operating conditions of service on which used.

D. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide dielectric

insulated unions and flanges from one of the following manufacturers:

- Aeroquip Corp. (U.S.A.) - Capitol Mfg. Co. (U.S.A.) - Dresser (U.S.A.) - The Duriron Co (U.S.A.) - Epco Sales Inc. (U.S.A.) - Approved equal

2 04 Vacuum Breakers




A. Vacuum breakers to be disc float, angle type, bronze body and trim, with

female screwed ends, suitable for a steam working pressure of 1030 kPa and designed to assure low pressure loss at rated flow. Disc float to be light weight and durable material and to have high heat and water hammer shock resistance. Seating is to be tight.

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide vacuum

breakers from one of the following:

- Friedrich Grohe (Germany) - Hersey Products Inc. (U.S.A.) - Approve equal

2 05 Escutcheon Plates

A. Escutcheons Plates: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep-pattern type where required to conceal protruding fittings and sleeves.

- Inside Diameter: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation. - Outside Diameter: Completely cover opening. - Cast Brass: One-piece, with set-screw. a. Finish: Rough brass. b.

Finish: Polished chrome plate. - Cast Brass: Split casting, with concealed hinge and set-screw. a.

Finish: Rough brass. b. Finish: Polished chrome plate. - Stamped Steel: One-piece, with set-screw and chrome-plated finish. - Stamped Steel: One-piece, with spring clips and chrome-plated

finish. - Stamped Steel: Split plate, with concealed hinge, set-screw, and

chrome- plated finish. - Stamped Steel: Split plate, with concealed hinge, spring clips, and

chrome-plated finish. - Stamped Steel: Split plate, with exposed-rivet hinge, set-screw, and

chrome-plated finish. - Stamped Steel: Split plate, with exposed-rivet hinge, spring clips, and

chrome-plated finish. - Cast-Iron Floor Plate: One-piece casting.

2 06 Pipe Sleeves

A. Pipe Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations:

- Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized,

plain ends. - Cast-Iron: Cast or fabricated wall pipe equivalent to ductile-iron

pressure pipe, having plain ends and integral water stop, except where other features are specified.

- Wall Penetration Systems: Wall sleeve assembly, consisting of housing, gaskets, and pipe sleeve, with 1 mechanical-joint end conforming to A WWA C110 and 1 plain pip=-sleeve end.

B. Penetrating Pipe Deflection: 5 percent without leakage. C. Housing: Ductile-iron casting having waterstop and anchor ring, with ductile-

iron gland, steel studs and nuts, and rubber gasket conforming to A WWA C 1 1 1, of housing and gasket size as required to fit penetrating pipe.

D. Pipe Sleeve: AWWA C151, ductile-iron pipe. E. Housing-to-Sleeve Gasket: Rubber or neoprene push-on type of

manufacturer’s design.




- Cast-Iron Sleeve Fittings: Commercially made sleeve having an

integral clamping flange, with clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.

F. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set-screws.

2 07 Mechanical Sleeve Seals

A. Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates which cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation.

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical sleeve seals from one of the following manufacturer.

Thunderline Corp. (U.S.A.) Approved Equal 2 08 Fire Barrier Penetration Seals

A. Provide seals for any opening through fire-rated walls, floors, or ceilings used as passage for mechanical components such as piping or ductwork..

B. For cracks, voids, or holes up to 100 mm diameter, use putty or caulking, one- piece intumescent elastomer, non-corrosive to metal, compatible with synthetic cable jackets, and capable of expanding 10 times when exposed to flame or heat, UL-1 isted.

C. For openings 100 mm or greater, use sealing system capable of passing 3-

hour fire test in accordance with ASTM E-814, consisting of wall wrap or liner, partitions, and end caps capable of expanding when exposed to temperatures of (121 to 177 deg. C), UL-listed.

D. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire barrier

penetration seals from one of the following manufacturers: - Electro Products Div./3 M - Nelson, Unit of General Signal - Approved equal

2 09 Flashing Sleeves

Flashing Sleeves: Coated cast iron, caulking type, as manufactured by Zurn No. Z-196 or Josam No. 1840, or approved equal.

2 10 Drip Pans

A. Provide drip pans fabricated from corrosion-resistant sheet metal with watertight joints, and with edges turned up 65 mm . Reinforce top, either by structural angles or by rolling top over 6 mm steel rod.

B. Provide hole, gasket, and flange at low point for watertight joint and 1” drain line connection.




2 11 Masonry Bolts

Masonry bolts to be of approved make, minimum 20 mm diameter.

Part 3: Execution 3 01 Strainers

A. Install strainers full size of pipe run, in accordance with manufacturer’s

installation instructions.

B. Install pipe nipple and shutoff valve in strainer blow down connection, full size of connection, except for strainers 50 mm and smaller installed ahead of control valves feeding individual terminals. Where indicated, provide drain line from shutoff valve to plumbing drain, full size of blow down connection.

C. Locate strainers in supply line ahead of the following equipment, and

elsewhere as indicated, if integral strainer is not included in equipment: - Pumps - Temperature control valves - Pressure reducing valves - Temperature or pressure regulating valves

3 02 Dielectric Insulated Unions and Flanges

Install at each piping joint between ferrous and non-ferrous piping. Comply with manufacturer’s installation instructions.

3 03 Vacuum Breakers

Install vacuum breakers where indicated and as determined by Contractor as required to prevent piping systems from being exposed to vacuum conditions.

3 04 Escutcheon Plates

A. Install pipe escutcheons plates on each pipe penetration through floors, walls, partitions, and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view, and on exterior of building, according to the following:

- Chrome-Plated Piping: Cast-brass, one-piece, with set-screw, and

polished chrome-plated finish. Use split-casting escutcheons, where required, for existing piping.

- Uninsulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast-brass or stamped-steel, with set-screw.

- Uninsulated Piping Floor Plates in Utility Areas: Cast-iron floor plates. - Insulated Piping: Cast-brass or stamped-steel, with concealed -hinge,

spring clips, and chrome-plated finish. - Piping in Utility Areas: Cast-brass or stamped-steel, with set-screw or

spring clips.

B. Secure escutcheon plate to pipe or insulation so escutcheon covers penetration hole, and is flush with adjoining surface.




3 05 Pipe Sleeves

A. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, concrete floor and roof slabs, and where indicated. Do not install sleeves through structural members except as detailed on Drawings, or as reviewed by Engineer. Install sleeves as follows:

- Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

B. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas (50 mm) above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring where specified.

- Build sleeves into new walls and slabs as work progresses. - Install large enough sleeves to provide (6mm) annular clear space

between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:

C. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than (150 mm). D. Cast-Iron Sleeve Fittings: For floors having membrane waterproofing. Secure

flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to (50 mm) above finished floor level. Flashing is specified

1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with nonshrink,

nonmetallic grout.

- Except for below-grade wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using elastomeric joint sealants specified in Division 7 Section ”Joint Sealants”.

E. Above Grade, Exterior Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for (25mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installation of mechanical seals.

- Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than (150 mm). - Install cast-iron wall pipes for sleeves (150 mm) and larger. - Assemble and install mechanical seals according to manufacturer’s

printed instructions.

F. Below Grade, Exterior Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron wall pipes for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for (25mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installation of mechanical seals.

G. Below Grade, Exterior Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Install ductile-iron wall penetration system sleeves according to manufacturer’s printed installation instructions.

H. Install sleeves accurately centered on pipe runs. I. Size sleeves so that piping and insulation(if any) will have free movement in

sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion; but not less than 2 pipe sizes larger than piping run. Where insulation includes vapor-barrier jacket, provide sleeve with sufficient clearance for installation.

J. Install length of sleeve equal to thickness of construction penetrated, and

finish flush to surface; except floor sleeves. Extend floor sleeves 6 mm above level floor finish, and 20 mm above floor finish sloped to drain.

K. Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement of concrete and other

work around sleeves, and provide temporary closure to prevent concrete and other materials from entering sleeves.

L. Install iron-pipe sleeves at exterior penetrations; both above and below




grade.

M. Refer to NFPA Standard 13 for special requirements of floor sleeve extension in rooms containing sprinklers.

N. Install steel-pipe except as otherwise indicated.

O. Sleeve Seals: Fill and pack annular space between sleeve and pipe with

oakum, calk with lead, on both sides. 3 06 Mechanical Sleeve Seals

Loosely assemble rubber links around pipe with bolts and pressure plates located under each bolt head and nut. Push into sleeve and center. Tighten bolts until links have expanded to form watertight seal.

3 07 Fire Barrier Penetration Seals

A. Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors-at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestopping sealant material. Fire stopping materials are specified.

3 08 Drip Pans

A. Locate drip pans under piping passing over or within 1 meter horizontally of electrical equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

B. Hang from structure with rods and building attachments. Weld rods to sides of drip pan.

C. Brace to prevent sagging or swaying.

D. Connect 25 mm drain line to drain connection, and run to nearest plumbing drain or elsewhere as indicated.




Division 15- Mechanical Work Section 15135 - Meters and Gauges Part 1: General 1 01 Related Documents

Drawings and project general provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary of the project specifications.

1 02 Summary

This Section includes meters and gages used in plumbing fire fighting systems.

- Meters and gages furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment

are specified as part of the equipment assembly in other Sections. 1 03 Submittals

A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract.

B. Product data for each type of meter, gage, and fitting specified. Include

scale range, ratings, and calibrated performance curves, certified where indicated. Submit a meter and gage schedule showing manufacturer’s figure number, scale range, location. and accessories for each meter and gage.

C. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of meters and gages

certifying accuracies under specified operating conditions and compliance with specified requirements.

D. Maintenance data to include in the “ Operating and Maintenance

Manuals ‘ General Requirements include data for the following : - Test plugs. - Flow measuring systems. - Flow meters.


A. Comply with applicable portions of American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) and Instrument Society of America (ISA) standards pertaining to construction and installation of meters and gages.

Part 2: Product 2 01 Manufacturers

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following or approved equal:




- Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:

1. Marsh Instrument Co. 2. Marshalltown Instruments, Inc. 3. H.O. Trerice Co. 4. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 5. Weksler Instruments Corp.

- Pressure Gages:

1. AMETEK, U.S. Gauge Div. 2. Ashcroft by Dresser Industries, Instrument Div. 3. Marsh Instrument Co. 4. Marshalltown Instruments, Inc. 5. H.O. Trerice Co. 6. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 7. Weksler Instruments Corp. 8. WIKA Instruments Corp.

- Test Plugs:

1. Flow Design, Inc. 2. MG Piping Products Co. 3. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc. 4. Sisco Co., Spedco, Inc. 5. H.O. Trerice Co. 6. Watts Regulator Co.

- Flow Indicators:

1. Anderson by Dwyer Instruments, Inc. 2. Brooks Instrument Div., Emerson Electric Co. 3. Ernst Gage Co. 4. Ketema, Inc., Schutte and Koerting Div. e. 5. Penberthy, Inc. f. 6. Visi-Flo by OPW Div., Dover Corp.

2 02 Thermometers, General

A. Scale Range: Temperature ranges for services listed as follows:

- Domestic Hot Water: 0 to 115 deg C, with 1 degree scale divisions. - Domestic Cold Water: Minus 18 to 38 deg C, with 1 degree scale

divisions. - Hot Water: 0 to 150 deg C, with 1 degree scale divisions.

B. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one

scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range span. 2 03 Pressure Gages

A. Description: ASME B40.1, Grade A phosphor-bronze Bourdon-tube pressure gage. with bottom connection.

B. Case: Drawn steel, brass, or aluminum with 115 mm (4-1/2”) diameter

glass lens.

C. Connector: Brass, 6 mm (1/4”) NPS.

D. Scale: White-coated aluminum, with permanently etched markings.




E. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span.

F. Range: Conform to the following:

- Vacuum: 30 inches Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure. - Vacuum: 100 kPa of vacuum to 100 kPa of pressure. - Fluids Under Pressure: 2 times operating pressure.

2 04 Pressure-Gage Accessories

A. Syphons: 6 mm straight coil of brass tubing with threads on each end. B. Snubbers: 6 mm brass bushing with corrosion-resistant porous-metal

disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure. 2 05 Test Plugs

1. Description: Nickel-plated brass-body test plug in 15 mm fitting. 2. Body: Length as required to extend beyond insulation.

3. Pressure Rating: 3450 kPa (500 psig) minimum. 4. Core Inserts: 2 self-sealing valve types, suitable for inserting a 3 mm

outside- diameter probe from a dial thermometer or pressure gage.

5. Core Material: According to the following for fluid and temperature range:

- Air, Water, Oil, and Gas: Minus 7 to 93 deg C, neoprene rubber. - Air and Water: Minus 35 to 136 deg C, ethylene-propylene-diene-

terpolymer (EPDM) rubber. 6. Test-Plug Cap: Gasketed and threaded cap, with retention chain. 7. Test Kit: Provide test kit consisting of 1 pressure gage and gage

adapter with probe, 2 bimetal dial thermometers and a carrying case.

8. Pressure Gage and Thermometer Ranges: Approximately 2 times systems operating conditions.

2 06 Flow-Measuring Systems, General

A. Flow-measuring systems include calibrated flow element, separate meter, hoses or tubing, valves, fittings, and conversion chart that is compatible with flow element, meter, and system fluid.

B. Flow range of flow-measuring element and meter covers operating

range of equipment or system where used. 2 07 Flow Indicators

A. Description: Instrument for visual verification of flow made for installation in piping systems that measures flow directly in L/s (gallons/minute).

B. Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body with sight glass and plastic pelton- wheel indicator.

C. Pressure Rating: 860 kPa.




D. Temperature Rating: 93 deg C.

2 08 Water Meter

In-line, dry dial, magnetic drive type, manufactured from corrosion resistant materials and suitable for a working pressure of 10 kg/cm2 and a cold water temperature of up to 50 deg. C. Meter to be sized for the specified flow rate at a maximum head loss of 2.5 m water gauge, and to have the manufacturer’s guaranteed accuracy of +/-5% at the minimum flow rate. Dial registration to go up to 1,000,000 cubic meter. Meter to have a combination dial and roller totalizer in a hermetically sealed casing to preclude glass misting, moisture corrosion and tampering, a hot pressed brass body and a hinged cover, with male threaded ends for union connections into the line. Meter to be as manufactured by Kent Meters Ltd., type ESJ or EMJ, or approved equal.

Part 3: Execution 3 01 Meter and Gage Applications

General: Where indicated, install meters and gages of types, sizes, capacities, and with features indicated.

3 02 Meter and Gage Installation, General

Install meters, gages, and accessories according to manufacturers’ written instructions for applications where used.

3 03 Thermometer Installation

A. Install thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions. B. Install in the following locations and elsewhere as indicated:

- At inlet and outlet of each hydraulic zone. - At inlet and outlet of each hydraulic chiller. - At inlet and outlet of each hydraulic coil in air-handling units and built-

up central systems. - At inlet and outlet of each hydraulic heat exchanger.

C. Remote-Reading Dial Thermometers: Install in control panels with tubing connecting panel and thermometer bulb supported to prevent kinks. Use minimum tulen.

D. Thermometer: Install in vertical position in piping tees where

thermometers are indicated.

- Install wells with stem extending minimum of 50 mm into fluid. - Install wells with stem extending to center of pipe. - Fill wells with oil or graphite and secure caps.

3 04 Pressure Gage Installation

A. Install pressure gages in piping tee with pressure gage valve located on

pipe at most readable position. B. Install in the following locations and elsewhere as indicated:




- At suction and discharge of each pump. - At discharge of each pressure-reducing valve. - At building water service entrance.

C. Pressure Gage Needle Valves: Install in piping tee with snubber.

Install syphon instead of snubber for steam pressure gages. 3 05 Test Plug Installation

Install test plugs in piping tees where indicated, located on pipe at most readable position. Secure cap.

3 06 Flow-Measuring System, Flow Element And Meter Installation

A. General: Install flow meters for piping systems located in accessible locations at most readable position.

B. Locations: Install flow measuring elements and meters at discharge of each pump, at inlet of each hydraulic coil in built-up central systems, and elsewhere as indicated.

C. Differential-Pressure-Type Flow Elements: Install minimum straight

lengths of pipe upstream and downstream from element as prescribed by the manufacturer’s installation instructions.

D. Install connection fittings for attachment to portable flow meters in

readily accessible locations.

E. Permanently Mounted Meters for Flow Elements: Install meters on walls or brackets in accessible locations.

F. Install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow elements

and meters as prescribed by manufacturer’s written instructions. 3 07 Flow Meter Installation

Include 10 pipe diameters upstream and 5 pipe diameters downstream of straight unrestricted piping for 32 mm and smaller pipe. Include 20 pipe diameters upstream and 10 pipe diameters downstream for 40 mm and larger pipe.

3 08 Connections

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. The Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow

servicing and maintenance. C. Connect flow-measuring-system elements to meters. D. Connect flow-meter transmitters to meters. E. Connect Btu-meter transmitters to meters. F. Make electrical connections to power supply and electrically operated

ineters and devices.




3 09 Adjusting and Cleaning

A. Calibrate meters according to manufacturer’s written instructions,

after installation. B. Adjusting: Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best

visibility.

C. Cleaning: Clean windows of meters and gages and factory-finished surfaces. Replace cracked and broken windows and repair scratched and marred surfaces with manufacturer’s touchup paint.





Division 15 - Mechanical Work Section 15145 - Hangers and Supports Part 1: General 1 01 Related Documents

Drawings and project general provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and apply to this Section.

1 02 Summary

A. This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical systems piping and equipment.

B. Section "Pipe And Pipe Fittings" contain requirements that relate to this

Section:

C. Approved types of pipe hangers, supports and anchors are shown on the Drawings, and described in this section. Contractor may provide other types subject to approval by the Engineer.

D. Pipe supports and anchors are to be provided following the

requirements of this section and other sections irrespective of whether they are indicated on the Drawings or not.

1 03 Mss Standard

Compliance with the Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry

A. Terminology used in this Section is defined in MSS SP-90. B. Provide pipe hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-58.

C. Select and apply pipe hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-

69.

D. Fabricate and install pipe hangers and supports complying with MSS SP-89.

1 04 Seismic Performance Requirements

Design seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment suitable for seismic zone of project.

1 05 Submittals

A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the project Contract.

B. Product data for each type of hanger and support.

C. Submit pipe hanger and support schedule showing manufacturer’s

Figure No., size, location, and features for each required pipe hanger




and support.

D. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under the ”Quality Assurance” Article.

E. Shop drawings for each type of hanger and support, indicating

dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of component assembly.


Listing and Labeling: Provide hangers and supports that are listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.

Part 2: Product 2 01 Hangers And Supports – General

A. Hangers and supports are to allow adjustment of slope of piping and removal without dismantling pipes.

B. Hangers and supports to be designed and tested to sustain load

times actual supported load.

C. Hangers and supports to be steel with smooth flat bearing surfaces, to carry weight of piping and contents without sagging, swaying, vibrating or deforming, and to allow free movement of pipes due to expansion and contraction without noise or damage to piping or construction.

D. Hangers and supports to be complete with all necessary structural

steel, rods, bolts, nuts, turnbuckles and other components. E. Select only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service. F. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare

piping, and to exactly fit around piping insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping.

G. Provide copper-plated hangers and supports for copper-piping

systems. 2 02 Manufactured Units

A. Hangers, Supports, and Components: Factory-fabricated according to MSS SP- 58.

- Components include galvanized coatings where installed for piping

and equipment that will not have a field-applied finish. - Pipe attachments include nonmetallic coating for electrolytic

protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

B. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 690 kPa (100 psi) average

compressive strength, waterproofed calcium silicate, encased with sheet metal shield. Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe and are of length indicated by manufacturer for pipe size and thickness of insulation.




C. Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type, drive-

pin attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. Fasteners for fire protection systems include UL listing and FM approval.

D. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. Fasteners for fire protection systems include UL listing and FM approval.

E. Pipe Anchor and Guides: 20 mm diameter U-bolts to fit around pipe

loosely for guides and welded to pipe for anchors. 2 03 Miscellaneous Materials

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.

B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex-head, track

bolts and nuts. C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers. D. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink, nonmetallic.

- Characteristics include post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry,

hydraulic- cement-type grout that is nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous and is recommended for both interior and exterior applications.

- Design Mix: 34.5 MPa, 28-day compressive strength. - Water: Potable. - Packaging: Premixed and factory-packaged.

2 04 Recommended Manufactures

- Grinnel - Approved Equal

Part 3: Execution 3 01 Hanger and Support Applications

A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in the Section specifying the equipment and systems.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications

that are not specified in piping specification Sections.

C. Install hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping.

D. Do not use wire, rope, wood, chain, strap or perforated metal to

support piping, and do not support piping from other piping. 3 02 Hanger And Support Installation

A. General: Comply with MSS SP-69 and SP-89. Install hangers,




supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. Provide intermediate steel where required to transfer loads to areas of structure where they can be safely accommodated.

B. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping supported

together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapeze hangers where possible. Keep pipes in position with U-bolts. Lines subject to extreme thermal expansion to be free to slide or roll. (Provide rollers on trapeze hangers)

C. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP-69, and the requirements of this section. Specified maximum spans are for straight runs of pipe.

D. Where pipes of various sizes are supported together by trapeze

hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers. Support vertical pipe risers independently of adjacent horizontal hangers.

E. Install building attachments within concrete or to structural steel.

Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, fianges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert to forms. Install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

F. Install concrete inserts in new construction prior to placing concrete.

G. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete

is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer’s operating manual. Do not use in lightweight concrete slabs or in concrete slabs less than 100 mm thick.

H. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is

placed and completely cured. Install according to fastener manufacturer’s written instructions. Do not use in lightweight concrete slabs or in concrete slabs less than 100 mm thick or in post tensioned slabs.

I. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts,

rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

J. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Field-fabricate from ASTM A 36 steel shapes selected for loads being supp. Weld steel according to AWS D-l. l.

K. Support fire protection systems piping independent of other piping.

L. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping

systems, permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

M. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and

dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. Support piping independently of equipment.




N. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 ”Building Services Piping” is not exceeded.

O. Anchors: Weld U-bolts to pipes at points of contact and bolt to

structural angle frame securely fixed to structure. P. Insulated Piping: Protect pipe insulation at hangers and supports

from weight or movement of pipe. Provide firm attachment to pipe. Comply with the following installation requirements.

- Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with

clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME B31.9.

- Saddles: Install protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without vapor barrier. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe insulation.

- Shields: Install MSS Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields to span an arc of 180 degrees (3.1 rad) and have dimensions in mm not less than the following:

Pipe size Length Thickness Mm Mm Mm

8 to 90 300 1.22

100 300 1.52 125 and 150 450 1.52 200 to 350 600 1.91 400 to 600 600 2.67

- Pipes 200mm and larger : Include wood inserts. - Insert Material: Length at least as long as the protective shild. - Thermal-Hanger shields: Install with insulation of same thickness as

piping. 3 03 Spacing Of Pipe Hangers And Supports

A. Cast Iron Pipe Supports:

- Support horizontal cast iron pipes at every joint, at base of each vertical stack, at each change in direction, at each branch connection and at not more than l. 5 m spaces on straight runs.

- Support vertical cast iron pipes at a minimum of each storey height.

B. Steel Pipe Supports:

- Support horizontal steel pipes at intervals not exceeding maximum support spacing and by hanger rod of minimum size as follows:

Pipe Maximum support Minimum size Diameted Spacing Of hanger rod

Mm Mm Mm

15 1.5 10 20 1.8 10 25 2.0 10 32 2.5 10 40 2.7 10 500 3.0 10 65 3.3 13 80 3.6 13




100 4.2 16 125 4.2 16 150 4.2 22 200 4.8 25 250 4.8 25 300 4.8 25 350 6.0 25 400 6.0 28 450 6.0 32 500 6.0 32 550 6.0 38 600 6.0 38

- Support vertical steel pipes at a minimum of every storey height.

3 04 Equipment Supports

A. Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment, and make a

smooth bearing surface. 3 05 Metal Fabrication

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for pipe and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld

connections that cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Dl. 1 procedures for manual

shielded metal- arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following:

- Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop

strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. - Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. - Remove welding flux immediately. - Finish welds at exposed connections so that no roughness shows

after finishing, and so that contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3 06 Adjusting

Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

3 07 Painting

A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint and paint exposed areas immediately after erection of hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

- Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of

0.05 mm




B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touch-up painting of field welds, bolted

connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9 Section ”Painting”,

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded

areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.




Division 15 - Mechanical Work Section 15190 - Mechanical Identification Part 1: General 1 01 Related Documents

Drawings and project general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1 02 Summary

This Section includes mechanical identification materials and devices including painting requirements.

1 03 Submittals

A. General : Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Specifications Sections.

B. Product data for identification materials and devices.

C. Samples of color, lettering style, and other graphic representation

required for each identification material and device.

D. Valve Schedules: Submit valve schedules for each piping system. Reproduce on standard-size bond parer. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), and variations for identifiction. Mark valves intended for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. Furnish extra copies (in addition to mounted copies) for Maintenace Manuals as spcified in thee project General Requirements.


Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.

1 05 Sequencing And Scheduling

Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completion of covering and painting where devices are applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.




Part 2: Product 2 01 Identifying Devices And Labels

A. General: Products specified are manufacturer’s standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Sections. Where more than single type is specified for listed application, selection is Contractor’s option, but provide single selection for each product category.

B. Equipment Nameplates: Metal nameplate permanently fastened to

equipment and having data engraved or stamped.

- Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and essential data.

- Location: An accessible and visible location.

C. Stencils: Standard stencils. prepared with letter sizes conforming to recommendations of ASME A13.1. 19 mm for access door signs and similar operational instructions. - Stencil Paint: Exterior, oil-based alkyd gloss black enamel, except as

otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form. - Identification Paint: Exterior, oil-based alkyd enamel in colors

according to ASME A13.1. except as otherwise indicated.

D. Snap-On Plastic Pipe Markers: Manufacturer’s standard pre-printed, semi-rigid snap-on, color-coded pipe markers conforming to ASME A13.1.

E. Pipes Smaller Than 150 mm: Full-band pipe markers, extending 360

degrees around pipe at each location.

F. Pipes 150 mm And Larger: Either full-band or strip-type pipe markers, at least 3 times the letter height and of length required for label.

G. Lettering: Manufacturer’s standard pre-printed terms as selected by the Engineer.

H. Lettering: Use piping system terms as indicated and abbreviate only as

necessary for each application length.

- Arrows: Either integrally with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as separate unit, on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.

I. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 6mm letters for piping system

abbreviation and 13 mm sequenced numbers. Provide a 4 mm hole for fastener.

- Material: 2.4 mm thick plastic laminate having 2 black surfaces and a

white inner layer. - Size: 38 mm diameter, except as otherwise indicated. - Shape: As indicated for each piping system.

J. Valve Tag Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain, beaded chain, or S-hooks.

K. Access Panel Markers: 1.6mm thick engraved plastic-laminate markers.

with abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to concealed valve. Provide 3 mm center hole for attachment.




L. Valve Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame, with screws for removable

mounting on masonry walls for each page of valve schedule.

- Frame: Extruded aluminum. - Glazing: ASTM C 1036, 2.5 mm, single thickness, sheet glass.

- Type: Type I, flat transparent. - Class: Class 1, clear. - Quality: Glazing B, for general applications.

M. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-

base, phenolic-resin-laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white (letter color) melamine subcore, except when other colors are indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for mechanical fastening.

- Engraved with engraver’s standard letter style, of sizes and with terms

to match equipment identification. - Thickness: 1.6 mm, for units up to 1300 mm’ or 200 mm length; 3 mm

for larger units. - Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws or contact-type

permanent adhesive.

N. Plastic Equipment Markers: Laminated-plastic, in the following color code:

- Green: Cooling equipment and components. - Yellow: Heating equipment and components. - Yellow/Green: Combination cooling and heating equipment and

components. - Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components.

- Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet any of above

criteria. - For hazardous equipment, use colors and designs recommended by

ASME A13.1. - Terminology: Include following, matching schedules as closely as

possible:

a. Name and plan number. b. Equipment service. c. Design capacity. d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and

leaving conditions, and rpm.

- Size: Approximate 64 mm by 100 mm for control devices, and valves; and 115 mm by 150 mm for equipment.

O. Plasticized Tags: Pre-printed or partially pre-printed accident-prevention

tags, of plasticized card stock with matt finish suitable for writing. - Size: Approximately 83 mm by 143 mm. - Fasteners: Brass grommets and wire. - Nomenclature: Large-size primary wording such as ”DANGER,”

”CAUTION,” or ”DO NOT OPERATE”.

P. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in mechanical identification, with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, letters, and terms indicated for




proper identification, operation, and maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment.

- Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same name are

indicated, identify individual system number as well as service (such as Pump No. 3, Sump Pump No. 1H, or Standpipe F12).

Part 3: Execution 3 01 Labeling And Identifying

A. Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow. - Stenciled Markers: Painted. color-coded bands or rectangles. - Plastic markers, with appropriate length of pipe insulation segment

where required for hot non-insulated pipes.

1. Fasten markers on pipes smaller than 150 mm by one of following methods:

- Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. - Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap. - Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or

insulation). - Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape.

not less than 19 mm wide, lapped 38 mm minimum at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.

2. Fasten markers on pipes 150 mm and larger by one of following

methods: - Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or

insulation). - Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape,

not less than 38 mm wide, lapped 76 mm minimum at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe.

- Strapped to pipe (or insulation) with manufacturer’s standard stainless steel bands.

- Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is

exposed in finished spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums) and exterior non-concealed locations.

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short take-offs for

fixtures and terminal units. Mark each pipe at branch, where flow pattern is not obvious.

3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, or enter non- accessible enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

6. Spaced at a maximum of 15 m intervals along each run. Reduce intervals to 7.5 m in congested areas of piping and equipment.

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced markers.




B. Valve Tags: Install valve tag on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, plumbing fixture supply stops, shut-off valves, faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose bibbs, and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in valve schedule. - Schedule: Comply with requirements of ”Valve Tagging Applications

Schedule” in Part 3 of this Section. - Install mounted valve schedule in each major equipment room.

C. Equipment: Install engraved plastic laminate signs or equipment markers

on or near each major item of mechanical equipment. Provide signs for following general categories of equipment: - Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and

hazardous units such asMeters, gages, thermometers, and similar units.

- Pumps, compressors and similar motor-driven units and similar equipment.

- Kitchen Equipment, pumps, swimming pools, studies, strainers, filters, water treatment systems, and similar equipment.

D. Optional Sign Types: Stenciled signs may be provided instead of

engraved plastic, at Installer’s option, where lettering larger than 25 mm (1”) high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification. - Lettering Size: Minimum 6 mm for name of unit where viewing

distance is less than 0.6 m, 13 mm for distances up to 1.8 m and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering 2/3 to 3/4 of size of principal lettering.

- Terms on Signs: In addition to name of identified unit distinguish between multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.

E. Plasticized Tags: Install within concealed space to reduceamountoftextin

exposed sign (outside concealment), where equipment to be identified is concealed above acoustical ceiling or similar concealment.

- Identify operational valves and similar minor equipment items located

in unoccupied spaces (including machine rooms) by installing plasticized tags.

F. Piping Systems: Identify cold water, hot water supply, return, with duct

markers; or provide stenciled signs and arrows showing duct system service and direction of flow.

- Location: In each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by

removable ceiling system. Locate signs near points where pipe enter into concealed space and at maximum intervals of 15 m.

3 02 Adjusting And Cleaning

A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices which have become visually blocked by work.

B. Clean face of identification devices, and glass frames of valve charts.




3 03 Cleaning And Painting

A. Clean equipment, material, piping etc. inside and outside by effective and approved methods to remove loose mill scale, blisters, sand, plaster, paint droppings, debris, dirt, oil, grease, labels, and all foreign matter. Clean and brush work in stages as directed before painting or concealing.

B. Surfaces to be painted: clean with wire brush and cleaning solution. Do not apply paint to wet or damp surface.

C. Black Steel Piping including flanges, bolts, nuts, cast iron valves and accessories, valve wheels and all ferrous parts to be painted with two coats of zinc chromate primer whether or not they are to be insulated. When bare or exposed to view, they are to be further painted with two coats of approved oil paint.

D. Piping run in trenches, shafts, underground or out- doors, including flanges, bolts, nuts, valves and all ferrous parts to be painted with two coats of zinc chromate primer and two coats of heavy bituminous solution paint.

E. Piping: when directed by the Engineer piping in machine room is to be

painted to conform to the ASME Colour Code. Alternatively stencil pipes to show service, size and direction of flow. Insulated pipes to be colour coded and stencilled over the external jacket.

F. Hangers and Supports including clamps, rods. bolts, nuts etc. are to be

painted v ith two coats of zinc chromate primer and where exposed to view with two additional coats of approved oil paint.

G. Damaged Surfaces of equipment to be restored to original condition by

cleaning and painting as directed. H. Unfinished Surfaces to be painted as directed. I. HT Surfaces to be painted with approved heat resistant paint. J. Apply Paint in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and

recommendations.




Division 15 - Mechanical Work Section 15300 - Fire Protection Part 1: General 1 01 Related Documents

A. Project general provisions of contract and supplementary conditions Specification sections apply to work of this section.

B. Basic Requirements for Plumbing and Fire fighting Material and Methods

sections apply to work of this section. 1 02 Scope of Work

A. Extent of fire protection work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section.

B. Installation of a hydraulically calculated separate standpipe system

complete and ready for operation. Contractor to submit full hydraulic calculation for the entire systems as per the drawings and the following specification.

C. Installation of a new fire pumps, sized to meet the systems flow and

pressure as per NFPA 14 to provide 440 kPa at the top of standpipe. D. Installation of all necessary accessories and controls for the proper

operation of the system as per NFPA 14, NFPA 20 and NFPA 24. E. Painting of exposed piping and supports to match surrounding background

in stairways and other finished areas and red in unfinished areas. F. Refer to the section of fire pumps and appurtenances; not work of this

section. 1 03 Codes and Standards

A. NFPA Compliance: Install fire protection systems in accordance with the following NFPA Standards: - Standards for the Installation, Maintenance and Use of Portable Fire

Extinguisher - NFPA 10. - Standards for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems NFPA

14. - Standard for the Installation of Centrifugal Fire Pumps - NFPA 20, - Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and their

Appurtenances - NFPA 24. - National Electrical Code - NFPA 70.

B. UL ( Underwriter Laboratory ) Compliance: Provide fire protection products

in accordance with UL standards; provide UL label on each product. C. FM (Factory Mutual) Compliance: Provide fire protection products and

installations in accordance with FM standards and approved for 300 psi working pressure; provide FM label on each product.




D. Fire Department/Marshal Compliance: All material and equipment necessary to meet the requirements of codes and the requirements of the local fire authorities are to be provided regardless of failure to specifically mention same in this Section or to show on Drawings.

E. Screw Thread Connections: Comply with local Fire Department

regulations for sizes, threading and arrangement of connections for fire department equipment to fire protection systems.

1 04 Submittals

A. Hydraulic Calculations: Submit hydraulic calculations of the Fire Fighting Systems to the Engineer for approval.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data and

installation instructions for fire protection materials and products. Manufacturer’s literature and data sheets are to be submitted indicating the necessary installation dimensions, weights, materials and performance information. The performance is to include capacities, pressure drop, design and operating pressure, temperatures, and similar data. Complete electrical data, including power conditions, and identifying types and numbers, to be included. Where pertinent, electrical diagrams are to be provided. Literature and data sheets may be provided by standard sales sheets marked to indicate the specific equipment provided.

C. Certificate of Installation: Submit certificate upon completion of fire

protection piping work which indicates that work has been tested in accordance with NFPA 14, NFPA 20 and NFPA 24, and also that system is operational, complete, and has no defects.

D. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed

fire protection piping and products; in accordance with the general requirements of the project.

E. Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance data and parts lists

for fire protection materials and products. Include this data, product data spare parts list, shop drawings, approval drawings, approval calculations, certificate of installation, and record drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with the project requirements Contractor is to furnish data covering model, type and serial numbers, capacities, maintenance and operation of each item of equipment or apparatus. Operating instructions are to cover all phases of controls.

F. Valve Schedule: Furnish a printed schedule, in duplicate, describing each

valve by number, giving locations and service for which used. System identification to be as stipulated in the other sections of these specifications. One copy of this schedule is to be mounted under glass in a simple black enamel steel frame and hung in the mechanical equipment room where directed. The other copy is to be submitted to the Engineer before completion of the work.

G. Shop Drawings and Manufacturer’s Literature: Submit shop drawings and

manufacturers literature on fire protection system components, according to the following listing:

Hangers and Supports

Hanger Supports Brackets Hangers




Clamps Fire Protection Water Pipe, Fittings & Valves List of Manufacturers Piping Layout and Details Valves with thir types. Piping. Fittings

Fire Hose Systems

List of Manufacturers Piping Layout and Details Fire Hoses Water Flow Indicators Electric Alarm Switches Valve Supervisory Switches Valve and Hydraulically Calculated ID signs Manufacturers Installation Instructions for all equipment in brochure Other Leak Test Certificates Operation and Maintenance Instructions

Part 2: Products 2 01 Materials And Products - General

A. Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection to comply with installation requirements.

B. Provide materials and products of sizes and types matching piping and

equipment connections.

C. Provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in fire protection systems.

2 02 Basic Identification

A. Provide identification complying with Basic Requirements for Plumbing and Fire Fighting Materials and Methods

- At each outside alarm device, sign indicating what authority to call if device

is activated. 2 03 Basic Pipes and Pipe Fittings

A. Provide pipes and pipe fittings complying with “Basic Requirements for Plumbing and Fire Fighting Materials and Methods section “Pipes and Pipe Fittings”, in accordance with the following listing:

Underground Fire Water Piping

- Pipe Sizes 65 mm and Smaller: Black seamless steel pipe; threaded/ welding black malleable iron fittings.

- Wrapping: Machine wrap all underground black steel pipe with polyvinyl




chloride tape, using 50% overlap. Hand wrap fittings using 100% overlap wrap extending 150 mm beyond fitting onto wrapped pipe. Comply with tape manufacturer’s installation instructions.

- Pipe sizes 80 mm and Larger: Flanged ductile iron pipe and fittings. - Fire Water Piping Inside Buildings: shall be mechanical coupling type with

grooved piping. - Cut Grooved and Threaded pipes: shall be schedule 40 equivalent

according to ASTM A-135 Grade A. All pipes shall have a Corrosion Resistance Ratio, (CRR) of 1.00 or greater, as per UL listings.

- Roll grooved pipes shall be schedule 10 or schedule 10 equivalent according to ASTM A-795 Type E, Grade A.

- Pipes shall be black carbon steel, except in FM approved dry systems where pipe is to be ”hot-dip” galvanized in accordance with ASTM A- 123 zinc coating specifications.

B. Pipe Jointing Method: Pipes shall be joined via the Victaulic or equal

grooved Style 005 Rigid Firelock Coupling with Angle Pad Design for pressures up to 300 psi. Style 07 Zero Flex Design shall be used for pressure ratings up to 600 psi. Victaulic Style 77 or 75 or equal shall be used where system flexibility is required, at pumps and mechanical equipment to reduce vibration and noise. All couplings shall be cast of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A- 536, Grade 65-45-12 or malleable iron conforming to ASTM A-47 Grade 32510/ Housings shall be red or orange enamel coated or hot dip galvanized.

C. Gaskets: shall be Grade “E “EPDM compound (green coler coded)

conforming to ASTM D-2000, UL listed classified to ANSI/NSF 61 for water supply systems and flush seal gaskets for dry service. All gaskets shall be selected as per manufacturer’s recommendation according to service application. Gaskets must be manufactured by the same source for couplings and fittings to secure compability.

D. Grooved Fittings and Coating: Shall be cast of ductile iron conforming to

ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12 with grooved or shouldered ends for direct connection into the grooved piping system. Fittings shall be orange or red enamel coated or hot dip galvanized.

E. Fittings for Plain End Steel Pipe: Shall be Victaulic FIT fittings DN 25 mm,

DN 32 mm, DN 40 mm and DN 50 mm with self-contained Grade ”E” standard gaskets, internal pipes stop for uniform takeoff dimensions, plated 1/4 - turn positive locking lugs of heat treated carbon steel with externally visible locked position indicator for easy inspection of plain end steel with externally visisble locked position indicator for easy inspection of plain end steel with externally visible locked position indicator for easy inspection of plain end steel pipe connections prepared. FIT products to be used in dry systems. “L“ silicone gaskets.

F. Branch Outlets - Hole Cut Pipe: Hole cut branch outlets shall be Victaulic

style 920, 921, 927 or 929 or equal. Mechanical T branch connections with locating collar emerging into the hole. Gaskets shall be Grade E standard pressure responsive gasket. Direct sprinkler head connections, drop nipples and springs shall be made with Victaulic Style 925 Snap-Let outlet connection or equal. Branch shall have a machine cut hole at a predetermined position, on the centerline of the pipe, of a size to receive the housing collar, in accordance with manufacturers’ specifications using Victaulic Hole Cut Machines.

2 04 Basic Piping Specialties

A. Provide piping specialties complying with Basic Requirements for




Materials and Methods section “ Piping Specialties”, in accordance with the following listing:

Pipe escutcheons. Dielectric unions. . Pipe sleeves. Sleeve seals. Fire Barrier Penetration Seals.

2 05 Basic Supports and Anchors

A. Provide supports and anchors complying with Basic Requirements for Plumbing and Fire Fighting Materials and Methods section “ Supports and Anchors” , in accordance with the following listing:

- Adjustable steel clevis hangers, adjustable steel band hangers, or

adjustable band hangers, for horizontal-piping hangers and supports. - Two-bolt riser clamps for vertical piping supports. - Steel turnbuckles and malleable iron sockets for hanger-rod

attachments. - Concrete inserts, top-beam C-clamps. side beam or channel clamps

or center beam clamps for building attachments. 2 06 Basic Valves

A. Provide valves complying with Basic Requirements for Plumbing and Fire Fighting Materials and Methods section ”Valves”, in accordance with the following listing:

B. Shut Off and Butterfly Valve: Shall be UL listed and FM approved for 2065

kPa service supplied with a ductile iron body conforming to ASTM A-536 coated with a polyphenylene sulfide blend, a disc of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536 with EPDM coating providing bubble tight shut off. Sizes 65-150 mm shall have an approved weatherproof manual actuator su Cable for indoor or outdoor use with two single pole, double throw supervisory switches either pre-wired (WRD) or unwired (UWD) monitoring the open position as specified on the Drawings. The 200 mm size will be either unsupervised or feature factory installed DPDT switches monitoring the open position as specified on the drawings. Valves shall be installed in accordance with the latest published manufacturer’s specification.

C. Check and Non Return Valve: Shall be single disc, spring loaded, check

valves 65-300 mm as UL listed and FM approved for a single check and anti- water hammer service and for horizontal or vertical installation, supplied drilled, tapped and plugged downstream for drainage outlet with Grade ”E” EPDM seal, housing cast of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536 Grade 65-45-12 with grooved ends for installation with grooved end couplings rated for service up to 1725 kPa working pressure.

D. Ball Valves: 50-80 mm, UL listed and FM approved, supplied with a ductile

iron body to ASTM A-536 and a ball to Type 316 stainless steel. Valve will be either un-supervised or have factory installed double pole, double throw switches monitoring the open position. Valve shall be supplied with grooved ends to connect with grooved end couplings and rated service up to 2065 kPa working pressure. Valves shall be installed in accordance with the latest published manufacturer’s specification.




E. Alarm Check Valve: Shall be 40-150 mm spring assisted, UL listed and FM

approved for vertical installation supplied with Grade ”E” EPDM clapper seal, housing cast of Ductile Iron to ASTM A-536 Grade 65-45-12, serviceable without removal from the line. Valve to be connected with couplings as applicable rated for service up to 2065 kPa working pressure.

2 07 Special Valves

A. Provide valves, UL-listed, where indicated, in accordance with the following listing. Provide sizes and types which mate and match piping and equipment connections.

B. Detector Check Valves: Detector check valves to be galvanized cast iron

detector check with bronze by pass meter with gate and check valves, and weighted flapper and flanged ends.

C. Backflow Preventers: Backflow preventers to be reduced pressure type.

consisting of two spring-loaded check valves and a spring-loaded, diaphragm actuated, differential pressure relief valve located between the check valves. Unit to be galvanized cast iron.

D. Alarm Check Valves: Alarm check valves to be flanged units complete with

gauges and accessories piped to unit, retarding chamber, and less water motor alarm and outside gong.

2 08 Fire Protection Specialties

I. Provide fire protection specialties, UL-listed, in accordance with the following listing. Provide sizes and types which mate and match piping and equipment connections.

II.Water Flow Indicators: Water flow indicators to be of the paddle flow

clamp- on type with vane projecting into pipe through a hole drilled in pipe, instantly recycling operation on 110 volt, single phase, 50 hertz service, with contacts for connection to alarm center.

III. Alarm Bells: Provide alarm bell at each waterflow indicator and at

central location where indicated. Bells to be 150 mm size unless otherwise indicated, single stroke or vibrating type as required by the service, and are to operate on 110 volts, single phase, 50 hertz.

IV.Water-Motor Gongs: Provide where indicated, 250 mm weatherproof, red

enameled finish, water-motor gongs. V. Supervisory Switches: Provide UL-listed tamper switches for each

sprinkler, standpipe and fire pump control valve or where indicated, arranged to detect the open or closed position of control valves and to be connected to the fire alarm system. Standpipe hose valves and test and drain valves shall not be provided with supervisory switches. Switches to be attached to the various control valves being supervised and to be complete with tamper switches, required trim and electrical characteristics compatible with those of the fire alarm system. Switch housing to be finished in red baked enamel .

2 09 Siamese Connections

I. Wall Type Siamese Connections: Provide where indicated, wall type cast




brass flush Siamese connections and escutcheon plate assembly, with two, 65 mm fire department inlets with female hose connections, fire hose connection screw thread adapted to locally used hoses, equipped with individual drop clapper valves, equipped with plugs and chains, construction features as indicated, and constructed with the following additional construction features:

Finish: Chrome plate. Inlet Pipe: 100 mm (4”) pipe, 125 mm (5”) pipe, or 150 mm (6”) pipe (pipe size). Cast Lettering: ”AUTO. SPKR.”. Escutcheon: 180 mm x 360 mm rectangular.

2 10 Fire Hoses Station

I. Fire Hose Station: Provide where indicated, fire hose station assembly consisting of pin-type swing rack, angle hose valve with 65 mm x, escutcheon (if in cabinet or at concealed standpipe) nipple, unlined linen fire hose, coupling and hose nozzle, as follows:

Hose Size: 25 mm. Hose Length: 25 m . Nozzle Type: Fog, adjustable type.(Muli Purpose Spraying Nozzle). Rack: Steel, with red enamel finish. Metal Accessories: Brass with manufacturer’s standard finish (nozzle, couplings, valve, and similar items).

2 11 Portable Fire Extinguishers (Fe)

I. Provide where indicated, portable fire extinguishers in cabinets or mounted on wall brackets as shown on the Drawings. All extinguishers to be provided with an approved mechanical seal. Provide fire extinguishers in accordance with the following listing:

Fire Extinguisher: 9.5 litre, stainless steel, air pressurized type water extinguisher, UL-listed and labeled for Class A fires.

Fire Extinguisher: UL-listed and labeled for Class A, B and C fires. 4.5 kg (10 1b). dry chemical type with red enameled steel tank. squeeze grip release valve, hose and discharge nozzle.

2 12 Automatic Fire Extinguishers

A. Dry chemical powder type for ceiling mounted. Cylinder is to be provided with full vision pressure gauge, fusible link, and ceiling bracket. Automatic fire extinguisher is to operate automatically when the temperature in the room reaches the pre-determined level of the fusible link rating of 74C°.

2 13 List Of Manufacturers

Piping Black Seamless Steel - Piatra

- Mueller

- Approved equal Fittings - Grooved system victual

- Approved equal




Valves - Crane

- Kitz

- Nibco

- Cal-val

- Heresy

- Watts

- Approved equal Fire Protection Specialties - Grinnell

- Aurocall

- Potter

- Faraday

- Edwards

- Kidde ultrasonic

- Approved equal

Siamese Connections - Potter – Roamer

- Croke

- Approved equal Fire Hose and Lacks - Hart ford

- Approved equal Portable Fire Extinguishers - Ansul

- Potter roamer

- El-Khart Brass

- Corker – standard

- Approved equal

Part 3: Execution 3 01 Inspection

I. Examine areas and conditions under which fire protection materials and products are to be installed.

3 02 Installation Of Basic Identification

I. Install mechanical identification in accordance with Basic Requirements for Plumbing and Fire Fighting Materials and Methods

II.Install fire protection signs on piping in accordance with NFPA 14

requirements. 3 03 Installation Of Fire Protection Piping




I. Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with “Basic Requirements for

Plumbing and Fire Fighting Materials and Methods” section ”Pipes and Pipe Fittings”.

II.Comply with requirements of NFPA 14 for installation of fire hose piping

materials.

III. Install piping products where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that piping systems comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.

IV.Coordinate with other work, including plumbing piping, as necessary to

interface components of fire protection piping properly with other work.

V. Install drain piping at low points of piping systems. Provide dry drum drips where required.

VI.Install sectional valves in inlet piping, at bottom of each riser, and in loops

as indicated.

VII. Install water flow indicators where indicated. Mount supervisory switches on each sectional valve.

VIII. Install pressure gages at top of each standpipe.

IX.Install manual shutoff at each audible alarm station.

X. Install Inspector’s test connection where indicated, or at most remote point

from riser.

XI.Do not use Fire Fighting water pipes to supply water for other purposes.

XII. Provide flush and test connections at ends of cross and feed mains. Minimum size to be 25 mm.

XIII. Locate branch lines at not more than half branch line spacing from

wall. 3 04 Installation of Piping Specialties

I. Install piping specialties in accordance with ”Basic Requirements for Plumbing and Fire Fighting Materials and Methods” section ”Piping Specialties”.

3 05 Installation of Supports And Anchors

I. Install supports and anchors, in accordance with “Basic Requirements for Plumbing and Fire Fighting” section”Supports and Anchors”.

II.Support horizontal pipes at intervals not exceeding 3 m.

III. Support vertical pipes at every floor.

IV.Support cross mains piping independently of branch line hangers. Provide

one hanger on each length between branch lines. V. Install hangers without regard to location of pipe sleeves through walls.

Centre pipes in sleeves and do not use sleeves for pipe support.




3 06 Installation of Valves

I. Install valves in accordance with “Basic Requirements for Plumbing and Fire Fighting” section ”Valves”.

II.Provide valves on mains and branches for sectionalizing the system for

maintenance and operation and for flushing, draining and testing the system.

III. Provide 50 mm drain valves of the globe valve type base of sta. Slope

piping not less than 2% towards drain valves. IV.Install alarm check valves on main water supply pipe to every fire fighting

water distribution system at source of pressure. Install, test and adjust in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

V. Install detector check valves in horizontal position as indicated, orientated

for proper flow direction. Install by-pass meter with globe valve and check valve, in accordance with manufacturer’s installation directions.

3 07 Installation of Meters And Gages

I. Install meters and gages in accordance with “Basic Requirements for Plumbing and Fire Fighting” section ”Meters and Gages”.

3 08 Installation of Fire Protection Specialties

I. Install fire protection specialties as indicated, and in accordance with NFPA 14.

II.Install and connect water flow alarm gong as directed.

III. Furnish wiring requirements to electrical Installer for electrical wiring of

supervisory switches. 3 09 Installation of Fire Hose Stations

I. Install fire hose, racks and cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated, or if not indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities.

II.Furnish requirements to building trade of recesses in walls for fire hose

cabinets, as required by type and size of cabinet and style of trim, and to comply with manufacturer’s instructions.

III. Securely fasten hose racks to standpipe risers, and hose cabinets to

structure, square and plumb, to comply with manufacturers instructions. 3 10 Flushing

I. Prior to connecting fire risers for flushing, flush water feed mains, lead- in connections and control portions the piping. After fire piping installation has been completed and before piping is placed in service, flush entire hose system, as required to remove foreign substances, under pressure as specified in NFPA 14. Continue flushing until water is clear, and check to ensure that debris has not clogged nozzles.




3 11 Testing

I. Hydrostatic Testing: After flushing system, test fire piping hydrostatically, for period of 2 hours, at not less than 1380 kPa or at 345 kPa in excess of maximum static pressure when maximum static pressure is in excess of 1030 kPa. Check system for leakage of joints. Measure hydrostatic pressure at low point of each system or zone being tested.

II.Repair or replace piping system as required to eliminate leakage in

accordance with NFPA standards for ”little or no leakage” and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance.

3 12 Cleaning And Inspecting

I. Clean and inspect fire protection systems in accordance with “Basic Requirements for Plumbing and Fire Fighting” section ”Pipes and Pipe Fittings




Division 15 - Mechanical Work Section 15311 Fm-200 System Part 1: General 1 01 Section Includes

A. Total flooding, FM-200 fire suppression systems for the, hazardous materials store and inflammable materials store.

B. Interlocks with HVAC equipment and building fire alarm system etc. C. Sealing of openings, sleeves in fire rated walls/floors etc.

1 02 References

A. NFPA 2001 Standard on FM-200 extinguishing systems. B. NFPA 72 E - Standard on automatic fire detectors. C. ANSI B-2, I - Pipe threads.


A. Conform to the requirements of the following:

- National Fire Protection Association of USA. - Local Fire Authority.

B. Use only those products specifically listed approved for fire protection/detection

and alarm services by Underwriters Laboratories incorporated (FM) - USA Factory Mutual testing laboratories (UL) USA Fire Officers Committee (FOC) - UK or other similar agencies of international repute.

C. All materials used in this section and the shop drawings for this project shall

be approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall not place any order or proceed with any installation, prior to the receipt of the approval by the Engineer.

D. The FM-200 system shall be executed only by a specialist Contractor

licensed/ approved for the purpose. This Contractor shall have local representative, capable of commissioning and maintenance.

1 04 Submittals

A. Submit product data, samples and shop drawings under provisions of the project.

B. Submit printouts of the following, executed by an approved computer

programme.

1. System sizing calculations. 2. Pipe work sizing calculations, based on shop drawings. 3. Nozzle selection and drilling calculations based on as built drawings.




C. Comply with the standard of Fire protection systems in respect of product data and shop drawings, project record documents and operation & maintenance manual.

D. Submit listing/approval certificates, stating that the system and its components

comply with the NFPA requirements. 1 05 Delivery, Storage And Handling

A. Deliver products to site, store and protect products under provisions of the project.

B. Retain weatherproof covering on control panels, operating mechanisms etc,

until commissioning. 1 06 System Interfaces

A. Extend power supply connections to Isolating switch provided by the electrical trade.

B. Extend interlocking wiring up to starter panels of HVAC equipment, standby

diesel generator set etc. for the purpose of shutting off the equipment in the event of fire.

C. Provide terminal blocks in system control panel for the purpose of annunciation

of fire condition in FM-200 protected areas, in the building fire alarm panel.

Part 2: Product 2 01 Fm-200 System Control Panel

Solid state control panel of modular construction, to execute the following: A. General

- Fire alarm indication - General and zonal, - Fault indication - General and zonal, - Buzzer for fault indication and fire alarm diversion, - FM-200 storage pressure monitoring, - System status indication at each zone, - Key operated electrical switch with the following

Positions,

• Normal running. • Evacuation alarm. • Cancel alarm. Reset. • Reset. • Test fault. • Test fire.

- Holding of fire doors in open position.

B. On Receipt of Signal From First Circuit




- Sound general fire alarm. - Shut down interlocked equipment. - Release magnetically held doors. - Activate building fire alarm system. - Activate first circuit of extenguishant lock off unit.

C. On Receipt of Signal From Second Circuit

- Sound evacuation alarm. - Activate second circuit of extinguishant lock off unit

Which initiates discharge time delay. - Initiate cylinder release and directional valve opening

circuits at the end of time delay. - Release fire curtains.

2 02 Power Supply Unit Shall Contain The Following:

A. Mains Power Section

- Lockable isolator switch fuse suitable for 240 volts/I phase/50 Hertz supply, rated 15 amps.

- Solid State rectifier for 24 Volts DC output. - Supply Healthy indicator. '

B. Sanitary Power Section

- 1. Constant potential type battery charger suitable for

240 volts/I phase /50 Hertz input and 24 volts DC output of appropriate current rating.

- 2. Nickel cadmium battery bank for 24 volts output, to provide 48 hours standby power and one (1) hours full alarm power.

- 3. Battery connected indicator. 2 03 Smoke Detector

A. Optical or Ionization type protected against ingress of dust and dirt, suitable for use in areas with high wind velocity or fluctuating environmental conditions. The detachable base shall have indication for fire conditions and facility for connection for emote indicators.

2 04 Status Indicators

A. Status indicators shall be installed outside each zone, preferably above the door, Provide as many as the number of doors. Three nos, panel type lamps shall indicate the following:

- Amber System in automatic. - Green System locked off - manual discharge only. - Red Extinguishant discharged. The unit shall be

suitable for recessed installation.




2 05 Lock Off And Manual Discharge Station

A. Lock off and manual discharge station shall be installed at 130cm above finished floor level at the main entry to each zone. ,

B. The unit shall have key operated electrical switch with the following positions

and manual discharge break glass station as single combined unit or as separate nits; suitable for recessed installation:

- Normal running (system automatic). - System locked of - Evacuation alarm. - Manual discharge.

2 06 Evacuation Sounder

A. Use banshee type electronic sounder which produces continuous distinctive sounds. These shall be installed within each zone at a suitable location.

2 07 Alarm Bell

A. Alarm bell shall be under dome type of 6 inches size, fitted with circuitry for line fault monitoring. The unit shall be mounted outside the FM-200 room at 220cm above finished floor level.

2 08 Directional Valves

A. Directional valves shall be electrically operated type of appropriate sizes for each zone. The end connections shall be flanged or threaded with unions to enable disassembly. These shall be manufacturer's proprietary products of suitable rating with all necessary trim.

2 09 Fm-200 Discharge Manifold

A. FM-200 discharge manifold shall be fabricated from schedule 80, seamless wrought steel pipes by the specialist supplier in his factory. Connections to the system pipe work shall be flanged. All joints shall be welded and the assembly shall be certified for 600 psig working pressure. Use flanged joints between banks, where required.

2 10 Fm-200 Storage And Trim

A. CYLINDERS : Cylinders shall be certified and stamped by the US Department of Transportation . or equal, approved authority. FM-200 storage shall be super pressurized at 360 psig or 600 psig (at 70 Deg. F) at the discretion of the specialist supplier, subject to condition that all the system components shall be compatible and selected for this pressure and that refilling facilities are available in Egypt. However the super pressurization pressure shall not be accepted as a reason for increasing the number of cylinders,m equipment area or any

Such claim involving additional expense to the client. Filling density shall not exceed 70 lbs per cubic foot and shall not be less than 40 lbs per cubic foot.




B. CYLINDER BANK: Required number of cylinders shall be arranged together and attached to a structural steel framework, which in tum shall be anchored to the floor/wall to prevent displacement. The cylinders shall be positioned at least 10 cm above the finished floor level. The FM-200 discharge manifold shall be securely attached to the same steel framework.

C. CYLINDERVALVES

- Cylinder valves shall be of brass construction, pressure seated, high flow

rate design, incorporating a stainless steel piston with seal, pressure releasing pilot check assembly safety disc assembly, pressure outlet port and facility for connecting emergency manual release mechanisms.

- Valve actuators shall be electrically operated electric/pneumatic type for use with cylinder banks.

- The cylinder shall be fitted with a siphon tube to enable efficient discharge. - The cylinder valve shall be provided with suitable trim to prevent rocking or

spinning of the cylinder during discharge conditions, in the event of the cylinder being not properly fixed in position.

D. FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS: Metallic flexible hoses of appropriate pressure

rating, with union ends shall be used for the discharge ofFM-200 from the cylinder to the manifold.

E. NON RETURN VALVES:Non retum valve of brass construction shall be used

at entry to the manifold from each cylinder. F. PRESSURE GAUGE-SiVITCH: Pressure gauge-switch assembly shall be

mounted on the cylinder valve and shall be connected to the system control panel for cylinder pressure monitoring.

G. FM-200 STORAGE: FM-200 storage shall be sufficient to produce the

minimum recommended concentration in the biggest zone in the system, allowing for leakage and any other losses. The filling in each cylinder shall be such that all cylinders shall be equal and any number of fiJll cylinders shall be discharged in any one zone to attain the required concentration.

2 11 Nozzles

Nozzles shall be of chrome plated brass or aluminum alloy construction, of appropriate type and size to suit individual instances. The nozzles shall be drilled only after making computations based on actual as -built" pipe work. The nozzles shall have the orifice size and mode of installation (horizontal/vertical etc) punched on the body.

2 12 Piping

A. PIPES : Pipes shall be schedule 80 seamless, galvanized wrought steel. B. FITTING

- 2 Inch diameter and smaller: Galvanized malleable iron/forged steel,

threaded fittings of class 300 rating. - 2 1/2 Inch and larger (for FM-200 discharge manifold); schedule 80

wrought carbon steel/alloy steel fittings with butt welding ends.




C. PROTECTION: Two coats of zinc chromate (for galvanized surfaces) or red oxide primer and two coats of fire red enamel shall be given for pipe work on completion.

2 13 Supports And Anchors

A. HORIZONTAL PIPE WORK AT CEILING: Bad type hanger with locking sleeve and back nut.

B. HORIZONTAL PIPE WORK NEAR WALL: Fabricated steel wall bracket with

back plate. Use U-bolt with stop and lock nuts attaching pipe to bracket. C. HORIZONTAL PIPE WORK IN VOID : Offset riser clamp. D. VERTICAL PIPE WORK IN FM-200 ROOM: Offset riser clamp.

2 14 Sealants For Openings

A. Use fiberglass cloth bags filled with mineral fibers for sealing cable entry openings in fire rated walls/floors.

B. Use sleeves of scheduled 40 steel for all pipe penetrations. Pack annular

space with 6 lbs per cubic foot fiberglass and caulk both sides with fire rated sealant.

2 15 Recommended Manufacturer:

- Kidde. - Comtron. - Fike. - Approved Supplier

Part 3: Execution 3 01 Coordination

A. Comply with the general requirements of the Project for Fire Protection System.

3 02 Selection And Installation

A. FM-200 SYSTEM CONTROL PANEL

- Panels shall be fabricated from minimum1,5 mm thick sheet steel and shall have continuously welded butt joints. Apply two coats of red oxide primer and two coats of baked on Fire Red enamel, All required holes and cutouts shall be done at the factory. The enclosure standard shall be IP 44 as minimum requirement.

- All intemal wiring shall be done in a neat and professional manner using cable ties, slip-on spiral bundle sheaths etc. Provide ample bee lengths to allow fiJll swing of doors.

- Panels shall be stilllened with profiled sections welded to the back plate, as required for wall mounting. Panel shall be mounted with the top at 180 cm above FFL.




- Inside of Battery compartment of panels, shall be specially treated to resist corrosion from the battery electrolyte.

B. CONDUTING AND WIRING

- Use stranded copper, PVC insulated, color coded wires of appropriate size

for all power and control wiring. - Use crimped on brass terminal lugs for termination of wires. Use slip-on

numbering ferrules and number all terminals for quick identification. - Use heavy duty galvanized iron conduits for all exposed wiring. Fix these

to walls/ceilings with 2 piece clamps, spaced at no more than 120cm - Follow project electrical specifications in all respects.

C. PIPING

- Refer to and comply with Chapter (3) in this section in all respects. - Install all 'Tee' fittings after cylinder manifold, in the horizontal plane only.

Vertical side cuts are prohibited. - On completion of works, blow out the complete pipe work with compressed

air, before fixing nozzles.

D. SUPPORTS AND HANGERS

Refer to and comply with Chapter (3) in this section in all respects.

E. ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY

As far as possible, coordinate and obtain power supply for the FM-200 system from the Building Automatic Standby Power Supply system,

F. CYLINDER BANK - STEEL FRAME WORK

Fabricate with mitered, fully welded butt joints. Finish the joints by grinding. Apply two coats of primer and two coats of fire red enamel.

G. SIGNAGE

- Provide identification labels and warning signs as appropriate in English

and Arabic.

3 03 Inspection, Tests And Adjustments

A. During the manufacture (at Contractor's premises only) and installation and after completion of works; the system, sections of the systems or its components shall be tested by the specialist Contractor in the presence of the Engineer, as directed below or elsewhere. The Contractor shall procure all testing instruments and accessories and bear all costs in connection with the same.

- Basic materials for conformity with the specified standard. - Supports and anchors for ability to withstand required loads. - Piping in general for line, level and slopes. Pressure tightness at 100 psl

air/nitrogen prior to installation of nozzles, - Manifold for pressure tightness of directional valves, non- return valves

etc, by using live FM-200 cylinders . as appropriate. Other means such as Nitrogen may be used at the Contractor's discretion, provided that the Contractor ensures the feasibility,




- Standby battery power pack for capacity, charging, and duration of supervision power maintenance etc.

- Smoke detectors using calibrated smoke generating equipment. Unmeasurable smoke sources shall not be accepted. Manual lock off station, manual discharge break glass station, door holders etc, for proper operation, alarm and interlock functions, disconnect valve operating link from solenoid during such tests.

- Live FM-200 discharge test in any one zone at the Contractor's option. All system operational parameters included time delays, alarms and FM-200 concentration shall be measured and recorded. Test shall be repeated if results are not satisfactory.

3 04 System Demonstrations

A. Provide the services of a competent engineer to supervise the testing and commissioning of all equipment and the system and to train the Owner's personnel in all aspects of the same during a five (5) working day period, during normal working hours. Allow for all expenses in connection with the above.

B. Give minimum one weeks written notice and obtain the Owner's written

consent , prior to such demonstrations. C. Coordinate with EGYPTIAN Municipality Fire Prevention Bureau, arrange and

facilitate their visit to site during system tests, and obtain their approved. D. Conduct system performance checks (including detectors, lock - off station,

manual discharge, alarms and interlocks) prior to finale completion, 3 05 Guarantee (Defined In General Conditions As Defect Liability) And Maintenance

A. Refer - requirements to Conditions of contract for requirements B. Allow for the following activities in respect of the complete system, for

a period of 730 days from the date of substantial completion.

- Defect liability / breakdown maintenance, inclusive of replacement parts. - Preventive maintenance as scheduled, inclusive of replacement pans and

consumables. - Attending to emergency situations, which may damage property or

endanger lives, even outside normal working hours. C. Provide a written report to the Owner, detailing the maintenance work

performed; including dates, pans replaced etc. D. The Owner's personnel shall be allowed to witness or participate (without

damageous interference) in the above activities.




Division 15- mechanical work Section 15410- Plumbing Piping

Part 1 - General

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and project general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions of Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

2.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes plumbing piping systems to a point 1.5 m outside

the building. Systems include the following:

- Water distribution systems, including cold and hot water supply. - Drainage and vent systems, including sanitary and storm water.

B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that

relate to this Section:

- Section “Pipe and pipe fittings “for piping joining materials, joint constructions and installation requirements.

- Section “Meters and Gages “for thermometers, pressure gages and fittings.

3.1 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems

with the following minimum working pressure ratings, except where indicated otherwise:

- Water Distribution Systems, Below Ground: 1035 kPa. - Water Distribution Systems, Above Ground: 860 kPa or 1720 kPa for

pipes subjected to 50 m static head or more (writhing the first 15 floors )

- Soil, Waste, and Vent Systems: 3 m head of water. - Storm Water Drainage Systems: 3 m head of water. - Sanitary Sewage, Pumped Piping Systems: 1720 kPa. - Storm Water, Pumped Piping Systems: 1720 kPa.

4.1 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract

and General Requrements of Specification Sections. B. Product data for plumbing piping products.

C. Water samples, test results, and reports specified in ”Field Quality




Control” and ’ ”Cleaning” Articles. D. Shop and coordination drawings, drawn accurately to scale and

coordinating penetrations. 5.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with the provisions of ASME B31.9”Building Services Piping” for

materials, products, and installation. B. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on piping made

to specified standards.

PART 2 - PRODUCT

2.1 PIPES AND FITTINGS

A. General: The application of the following pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods required for plumbing piping systems are indicated in Part 3 Article ”Pipe and Fittings Applications”.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type S, Grade A, Schedule 40 or schedule 80

for pipes subjected to a static head of 50 m or more (lowest 15 floors), for BS3187, medium or heavy class seamless, galvanized, plain ends.

C. Polypropylene pipe:

- Polypropylene pipe to be unplastisized of the socketed type for ring

seal joints to BS 4491. - Polypropylene fittings to be socketed type for ring seal joints. Special

adaptors to be used for connecting PPC pipes and fittings to pipe of other materials.

D. Pressure type CPVC to BS 3505, Class E. E. Non pressure uPVC: above ground < 50 mm

Under ground > 50 mm. F. Steel Expansion Joints: Compound galvanized steel pipe fitting

consisting of telescoping body and slip-pipe sections, packing ring, packing, limit rods, flanged ends, and chrome-plated finish on slip pipe telescoping section.

G. Fittings used for CPVC shall be machine welded all pressure fittings

shall be 100% fiberglass reinforced (except couplings, reducer couplings oir reducer bushings).

2 02 VALVES

A. Refer to Section “Valves” for gate, globe, ball, butterfly, and check valves.

B. Refer to Section “Piping Specialties” for special-duty valves.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCA VATION

A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Section “Basic Requirements for Plumbing and Fire Fighting”.




3.2 PREPARATION OF FOUNDATION FOR BURIED

PIPING

A. Grade trench bottom to provide smooth, firm. stable, and rock-free foundation throughout length of piping.

B. Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at surface on which

piping is to be laid and backfill with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated level.

C. Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of piping. Fill unevenness with

tamped- sand backfill. Dig bell holes at each pipe joint to relieve bells of loads and to ensure continuous bearing of pipe barrel on foundation.

3.3 PIPE AND FITTINGS APPLICATIONS

A. General: Use pipe, tube. Fittings and joining methods for piping systems

according to the following applications. B. Water Distribution Piping Below Ground: Use the following:

- 50 mm and Smaller: Steel pipe, galvanized, malleable iron ’.hreaded

fittings. C. Water Distribution Piping Above Ground:

- Cold and hot water all sizes: CPVC or polypropylene pipe and

fittings.

D. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping Below Ground: Use UPVC piping and fittings

E. Storm Water Drainage Piping Above Ground: Use UPVC piping and

fittings

3.4 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:

- Shutoff Duty: Use gate, ball, or butterfly valves. - Throttling Duty: Use globe, ball, or butterfly valves. - Valve construction shall match pressure rating of piping system it is

installed in. Piping applications with higher ratings (PN16) for piping subjected to 50 m static head or more on the first 15 floors.

3.5 PIPING INSTALLATION. GENERAL

A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Section “Pipes and

Pipe Fittings”.

3.6 DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING INSTALLATION A. Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate

Y- branches, Y-branches with 1/8 bends, and long-sweep 1/4, 1/5, 1/6, 1/8, and 1/16 bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep quarter bends may be used on vertical stacks of drainage lines where change in direction of




flow-is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn double-Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings where 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side and have a common drain. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Make no change in direction of flow greater than 90 degrees. Where different sizes of drainage pipes and fittings are connected, use proper size standard increasers and reducers. Reduction of the size of drainage piping in the direction of flow is prohibited.

B. Lay buried building drains beginning at low point of each system, true

to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub or bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer’s recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other special installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

C. Install drainage and vent piping at the minimum slopes, except where

another slope is indicated:

3.7 INSTALLATION OF VALVES

A. Sectional Valves: Install sectional valves close to main on each branch and riser serving 2 or more plumbing fixtures or equipment connections and where indicated. Use gate or ball valves for sectional valves 50 mm and smaller. Use gate or butterfly valves for sectional valves 65 mm and larger.

B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valves on inlet to each plumbing

equipment item, on each supply to each plumbing fixture not having stops on supplies, and elsewhere as indicated. For shutoff valves 50 mm and smaller, use gate or ball valves; for shutoff valves 65 mm and larger, use gate or butterfly valves.

C. Drain Valves: Install drain valves specified in Section “Piping

Specialties” on each plumbing equipment item located to drain equipment for service and repair. Install drain valve at base of each riser, at low points of horizontal runs, and where required to drain water distribution piping system.

- Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains. risers, and

branches. - Install stop and waste drain valves where indicated.

D. Check Valves: Install swing check valve on discharge side of each

pump and elsewhere as indicated. Use MSS SP-80, Class 125, cast-bronze body for 50 mm and smaller piping and MSS SP-71, Class 125, cast-iron body for 65 mm and larger piping.

E. Balance Valves: Install valve in each discharge side of each pump and

elsewhere as indicated. Use ball valve for 50 mm and smaller piping and butterfly valve for 65 mm and larger piping.

3.8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS INSTALLATION

A. Hanger and support devices are specified in Section “Hangers and

Supports”. B. Install hangers for horizontal piping with following maximum spacing

and minimum rod sizes:




NOM. PIPE STEEL PIPE MIN. ROD SIZE MAX. SPAN DIAMETER

( INCHES ) ( FEET ) ( INCHES) Up to 3/4 7 3/8 1 7 3/8 1-1/4 7 3/81-1/2 9 3/8 2 10 3/8 2-1/2 11 1/23 12 1/2 3-1/2 13 1/2 4 14 5/8 5 16 5/8 6 17 3/4 8 19 7/8 10 22 7/8 12 23 7/8

C. Pipe Attachments: Install the following:

- Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8 or Type 42 for vertical runs. - Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1 for individual straight

horizontal runs 30 m and less. - Adjustable Roller Hangers: MSS Type 43 for individual straight

horizontal runs longer than 30 m. - Spring Cushion Rolls: MSS Type 49, where indicated, for individual

straight horizontal runs longer than 30 m. - Pipe Rolls: MSS Type 44 for multiple straight horizontal runs 30 m or

longer. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. - Spring Hangers: MSS Type 52 for support of base of vertical runs.

D. Support plastic pipe and tubing not included in table according to

manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.9 CONNECTIONS

A. Supply Run outs to Fixtures: Install hot and cold water supply piping run outs, but not smaller than required by plumbing code to fixtures.

B. Drainage Run outs to Fixtures: Provide drainage and vent piping run

outs, with approved trap, of sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code to plumbing fixtures and drains.

C. Locate drainage piping run outs as close as possible to bottom of

floor slab supporting fixtures or drains.

D. Mechanical Equipment Connections: Connect hot and cold water supply piping system to mechanical equipment as indicated. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection; provide drain valve on drain connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections 65 mm and larger.

E. Handling of solvent cements, primers and cleaners: comply with

procedures in ASTM-F402 for safe handling during joining of plastic pipe and fittings with solvent cements.

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect water distribution piping as follows:




- Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation water distribution.piping

system until it has been inspected and approved by the Engineer. - During progress of the installation, notify the Engineer at least 24

hours prior to time inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of the Engineer.

i. Roughing-In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping system

before concealed or closed-in after system roughing-in and prior to setting fixtures.

ii.Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by the Engineer to

observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements of plumbing code.

- Reinspections: When the Engineer finds that piping system will not

pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection by the Engineer.

- Reports: Prepare inspection reports signed by the Engineer.

B. Test water distribution piping as follows:

- Test for leaks and defects in new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of system tested.

- Leave uncovered and unconcealed in new, altered, extended, or replaced water distribution piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved for testing.

- Cap and subject the piping system to a static water pressure of 345 kPa (50 psig) above the operating pressure without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for4 hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

- Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

- Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

C. Inspect drainage piping as follows:

- Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation drainage and vent piping system until it has been inspected and approved by the Engineer and the authority having jurisdiction.

- During progress of installation, notify the Engineer at least 24 hours prior to time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of the Engineer. i. Roughing-In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping system

after system roughing-in, before concealing, and prior to setting fixtures.

ii. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by the Engineer to

observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements of the plumbing code.

- Reinspections: Make required corrections and arrange for

reinspection by the Engineer when piping system fails to pass test or inspection.

- Reports: Prepare inspection reports signed by the Engineer.




D. Drainage and Vent Piping System Tests: Test drainage and vent systems according to procedures of authority having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedure, as follows:

- Test for leaks and defects in new drainage and vent piping systems

and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with a diagram of the portion of the system tested.

- Leave uncovered and unconcealed in new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose for testing work that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved.

- Rough Plumbing Test Procedure: Except for outside leaders and perforated or open-jointed drain tile, test piping of plumbing drainage and venting systems on completion of roughing-in piping installation. Tightly close all openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 3 m head of water. Water level shall not drop during the period from 15 minutes before inspection starts through completion of inspection. Inspect joints for leaks.

- Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and their traps filled with water, test connections and prove gastight and watertight. Plug stack openings on roof and building drain where it leaves the building and introduce air into the system equal to pressure of 25 mm water column. Use a U-tube or manometer inserted in the trap of a water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure shall remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

- Repair leaks and defects using new materials and retest system or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

- Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.11 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows:

- Purge new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing

water systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired prior to use.

- Use purging and disinfecting -procedure prescribed by authority having jurisdiction or, if a method is not prescribed by that authority, the procedure described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or as described below:

i. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water

does not appear at outlets. ii.Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution containing

at least 50 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate (valve off) and allow to stand for 24 hours.

iii. Drain system or part thereof of previous solution and refill with water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours.

iv.Flush system with clean, potable water until chlorine does not remain in water coming from system following allowed standing time.

v. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to the Engineer or authority having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination made by the authority shows evidence of contamination.




B. Prepare and submit reports for purging and disinfecting activities. C. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work

progresses.

3.12 COMMISSIONING

A. Fill water systems. Check compression tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that system is completely full of water.

B. Before operating systems, perform these steps:

- Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. - Open shutoff valves to full open position. - Open throttling valves to proper setting. - Remove plugs used during testing of piping systems and plugs used

for temporary sealing of piping during installation. - Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace

drain plugs. - Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are

as specified for application where used, clean, and ready for use.

C. Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. Do not operate water heaters before filling with water.

D. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and

operation. E. Energize pumps and verify proper operation.

3.13 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid

clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted pipes at the end of the day or

when work stops. C. Exposed ABS or PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to

sunlight with 2 coats of a water-based latex paint.





Division 15- Mechanical Work SECTION 15411 - WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1 01 Related Documents

A. General Requirement for the project specification sections, apply

to work of this section B. “Plumbing Piping” section apply to work of this section.

1 02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Extent and connect with the existing of cold, hot and potable water

distribution systems work is indicated on Drawings and by requirements of this section.

.

B. Refer to other sections for “plumbing fixtures;” not work of this section.

.

C. Trenching and backfill required in conjunction with exterior water piping is specified in other sections, and is included as work of this section.

D. Trenching and backfill required in conjunction with water piping inside of building foundations is specified in other sections, and is included as work of this section.

PART 2 - PRODUCT 2 01 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS – GENERAL

A. Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of

sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection to comply with installation requirements.

B. Provide materials and products of sizes and types to match piping

and equipment connections. C. Provide fittings of materials as specified, which match pipe

materials used in water distribution systems. 2 02 BASIC IDENTIFICATION

A. Provide identification complying with section “ Basic Requirements

for Plumbing and Fire Fighting” section and “Mechanical Identification”.




2 03 BASIC PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS

A. Provide pipes and pipe fittings complying with “Basic Requirements

for Plumbing and Fire Fighting Materials and Methods “ Pipes and Pipe Fittings”, and “Plumbing Piping” sections.

2 04 BASIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Provide piping specialties complying with section “Piping

Specialties”, in accordance with the following listing:

Pipe escutcheons. Low-pressure Y-type strainers. Dielectric unions. Mechanical sleeve seals. Fire barrier penetration seals. Drip pans. Pipe sleeves. Sleeve seals.

2 05 BASIC SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS

A. Provide supports and anchors complying with “ Supports and

Anchors” and “ Plumbing Piping” sections . BASIC VALVES

A. Provide valves complying with Division-15 ”Valves” and ”Plumbing

Piping” sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 01 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which potable water systems

are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3 02 INSTALLATION OF BASIC IDENTIFICATION

A. Install mechanical identification in accordance with section “Basic

Requirements for Plumbing and Fire Fighting”. 3 03 INSTALLATION OF WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING

A. Install water distribution piping in accordance with “Pipes and Pipe

Fittings” and “Plumbing Piping” sections. B. Install piping with 1% downward slope towards drain point.

C. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit

applying full in servicing.




D. Install air vents at all high points of piping systems.

E. Install drain valves at all low points of piping systems.

3 04 INSTALLATION OF EXTERIOR WATER PIPING

A. Install underground piping at least 3 m away from any sewer line.

Protect from contamination from any source. B. Protect under ground galvanized steel pipes by wrapping with

special self- adhesive polyethylene tape, wound spirally and firmly around pipe, with adequate overlap. Pay particular attention to protection at the threaded joints.

C. Install exterior water service piping system in compliance with local

governing regulations.

D. Street Main Connection: Arrange and pay for tap in water main, of size and in location indicated. Cut into and install new tee for water service in existing water main, at location indicated, in accordance with local Water Utility Company requirements. Provide curb valve and curb box as indicated.

E. Water Service Piping: Extend water service piping of size and in

location indicated to water service entrance at building. Provide sleeve in foundation wall for water service entry; make entry watertight. Provide shutoff valve at water service entry inside building; strainer, pressure gage, test tee with valve.

3 05 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Install piping specialties in accordance with “Piping Specialties” and

“Plumbing Piping” sections. 3 06 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS

A. Install supports and anchors in accordance with Basic

Requirements for Plumbing and Fire Fighting Materials and Methods section “Supports and Anchors”.

3 07 INSTALLATION OF VALVES

A. Install valves in accordance with Basic Requirements for Plumbing

and Fire Fighting“ Materials and Methods” and “ Valves ” sections. B. Sectional Valves: Install on each branch and riser, close to main,

at branch out to each floor and where branch or riser serves two or more plumbing fixtures or equipment connections, and elsewhere as indicated.

C. Shutoff Valves: Install on inlet of each plumbing equipment item,

and on inlet of each plumbing fixture, and elsewhere as indicated.




D. Drain Valves: Install on each plumbing equipment item located to completely drain equipment for service or repair. Install at base of each riser, at base of each rise or drop in piping system, and elsewhere where indicated or required to completely drain potable water system.

E. Check Valves: Install on discharge side of each pump, and

elsewhere as indicated. 30 8 PIPING CONNECTIONS TO FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT

A. Piping Run outs to Fixtures: Provide hot and cold water piping run

outs to fixtures of sizes indicated.

B. Mechanical Equipment Connections: Connect hot and cold water piping system to mechanical equipment as indicated, and comply with equipment manufacturer’s installation instructions. Provide shut off valve and union for each connection. Provide drain valve on drain connection.

3 09 WATER RESERVOIR PIPE WORK

A. Install pipe connections into walls of the existing water reservoirs

and tanks Locate correctly and take precautions to prevent dislocation and entry of the existing pipes. Connections are to have no-leak flanges located centrally and are to project 50 mm within reservoirs and tanks and 150 mm beyond outside walls.

B. No-leak flanges to be 6 mm thick balck steel square plate,

dimensioned 150 mm larger than pipe diameter, welded all around pipe.

C. Provide galvanized steel mesh on open ended connections, fitted

in an approved manner. Mesh to be not less than 10 mesh/cm’.

D. Pipe inlet connections to have inverts at least 100 mm above top of overflow pipe.

E. Valved connections to have valves immediately adjacent to

reservoir or tank. 3 10 TESTING AND COMISSIONING

A. Test water distribution piping in accordance with testing

requirements of “Pipes and Pipe Fittings” and “Plumbing Piping” sections.

3 11 CLEANING. FLUSHING, INSPECTING AND DISINFECTING

A. Clean, flush, inspect and disinfect water distribution systems in

accordance with requirements of “Pipes and Pipe Fittings” and “Plumbing Piping” sections.




Division 15 - Mechanical Work Section 15412 - Soil and Waste Systems Part 1: General

A. RELATED DOCUMENTS

1. The project specification sections apply to work of this section. 2. Plumbing piping section apply to work of this section.

B. SCOPE OF WORK

1. Extent and connect with the existing of soil and waste systems work’s

indicated on drawings and by requirements of this section. 2. Exterior sanitary sewer system required in conjunction with soil and

waste systems, up to the manholes outside the building, is work of this section.

3. Flashings required in conjunction with soil and waste systems are

included as work of this section.

4. Refer to other sections not work of this section.

Part 2 - Product 2 01 Materials And Products - General

A. Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, and capacities as indicated.

B. Provide materials and products of sizes and types to match piping

and equipment connections.

C. Provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in soil and waste systems; preferably the product of same manufacturer.

2 02 Basic Pipes and Pipe Fittings

A. Provide pipes and pipe fittings complying with section ”Pipes and Pipe Fittings”, and ”Plumbing Piping” sections and with section.


A. Provide piping specialties complying with section ”Piping Specialties”, in accordance with the following listing:

Pipe Escutcheons Mechanical Sleeve Seals Fire Barrier Penetration Seals Drip Pans Pipe Sleeves Sleeve Seals




2 04 Basic Supports And Anchors

A. Provide supports and anchors complying with" Hangers and Supports and ”Plumbing Piping” sections.

2 05 Drainage Piping Products - General

A. Provide factory-fabricated drainage piping products of size and type indicated in the drawings and pricing schedules.

2 06 Cleanouts

A. Cleanouts to be full size, square head, brass, screwed plugs fitted Cleanouts shall be easily accessible. Provide a minimum clearance of 600 mm for the rodding.

B. Cleanouts at base of stacks to be extra heavy Y-branch or tee branch

cleanout with full size brass screw plug.

C. Cleanouts in suspended soil pipe shall consist of cast brass tapered screw plug in fitting or caulked Plain end piping in interstitial space or above ceiling may use plain end blind plug and clamp

D. Floor cleanouts shall have external frame with square adjustable

scoriated secured nickel bronze top. Unit shall be vertically adjustable for a minimum of 50 mm. When a waterproof membrane is used in the floor system, provide clamping collars on the cleanouts. Cleanouts shall consist of ”Y” fittings and 3 mm bends with brass or bronze screw plugs. Cleanouts in the resilient tile floors, quarry tile and ceramic tile floors shall be provided with square top covers recessed for tile insertion. In the carpeted areas, provide carpet cleanout markers

E. Floor cleanouts to be carefully set at locations and elevations indicated on the drawings. Set level and square with floor construction.

F. Cleanouts in finished areas to be adjustable, cleanout with square

nickel bronze top.

G. Cleanouts in concrete floors where heavy traffic occurs to be adjustable cast- iron cleanout bodies with heavy duty cast-iron tractor cover and neoprene seal plug.

H. Cleanouts in floors to be provided with carpeting to be as specified for

finished areas with carpet marker.

I. Cleanouts in walls to be cast-iron caulk ferrule, cast bronze lead seal counter sunk plug and stainless steel shallow cover with screw.

2 07 Type Of Drains

A. ϕ 50mm Floor Drain: To be used in toilets and bathrooms.

B. ϕ 110mm Roof (Drain Gutter): To be used for roofs.




Part 3: Execution 3 01 Inspection

A. Examine substrates and conditions under which soil and waste systems are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Contractor.

3 02 Installation Of Above Ground Piping

A. Install soil and waste piping in accordance with ”Pipes and Pipe Fittings”, and ”Plumbing Piping” sections.

B. Lay horizontal pipes at uniform slope of not less than 1% and not

more than 3%.

C. Changes of direction in pipes are to be gradual using long sweep fittings and 45 degree fittings.

D. Avoid unnecessary turns and offsets and run wastes as direct as

possible from sanitary fixtures to vertical stacks.

E. Vent sanitary fixtures to prevent siphonage of traps and air binding.

F. Slope vent pipes and connect to drip back into soil or waste pipe by gravity.

G. Where connected to a horizontal soil or waste pipe connect vent pipe

above centreline of soil or waste pipe. Vent pipe is to rise vertically or at an angle of not more than 45 degrees from vertical to a point at least 150 mm above flood level rim of fixture before offsetting horizontally or before connecting to branch vent.

H. All gravity waste drain lines inside the building with vertical drops over

6 m shall be provided with joint restraint on the vertical drop and horizontal offset or branch below the vertical drop. Joint restraint shall be accomplished by threaded, soldered. or grooved joints or a combination of pipe clamps and tie- rods as detailed in NFPA 24. Vertical joint restraint shall be provided from the fitting at the bottom of the vertical drop through every oint up to the riser clamp at the floor penetration of the floor above. Horizontal joint restraint shall be provided from the same fitting at the bottom of the vertical drop through every joint on the horizontal offset or branch for a minimum of 18 m or to anchoring point from the building structure. Joint restraint below ground shall be accomplished by thrust blocks detailed in NFPA 24.

I. Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire partitions, fire walls,

smoke partitions, or floors, install a fire stop that provides an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases. Completely fill and seal clearances between raceways and openings with the fire stopping materials.

J. At floor penetrations, completely seal clearances around the pipe and

make watertight with sealant.

K. Connect vent pipes to vent stack at least 150 mm above fiood level rim of highest fixture served by vent.




L. Vent pipes above roof are to pass through flashed and waterproofed sleeves.

3 03 Install. Action of Building Drain Piping

A. Lay underground building drains beginning at low point of systems, true to grades alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert.

B. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream.

C. Install required in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations

for use of lubricants, cements, and other special installation requirements.

D. Clean interior of piping of dirt and other superfluous material as work

progresses. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed.

E. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever

work stops.

F. Install soil and vent piping pitched to drain at minimum slope of one percent (1%).

G. Lay pipes on good foundation to prevent settlement. Pipes laid in

trenches to have solid uniform bearing throughout their length.

H. Lay pipes in trenches supported along their length on layer of clean compacted sand.

I. Lay pipes to uniform slope not exceeding 3% and true to line and

grade.

J. Lay pipes at not less than 600 mm below finished grade and not closer than 1 m to bearing walls and footings.

K. Free vertical drop of sewer pipe into manhole is not to exceed 450

mm from invert of pipe to invert of manhole.

L. Make connections to manholes, city sewers or other underground structure in a watertight approved manner. Full circle of pipe is to be visible at manhole.

M. Make connections to existing systems with minimum disturbance to

existing lines. Existing pipes or structures damaged whilst making connections are to be replaced or reconstructed to the Engineer’s satisfaction at no extra cost.

N. Join concrete pipes by inserting a layer of jute or hemp dipped in

Portland cement slurry into joint base. Fill remaining space with cement mortar (1:2), ram and trowel mortar to form 45 degree taper with pipe barrel. Clean pipe interior to remove mortar.

3 04 Installation of Piping Specialties

A. Install piping specialties in accordance with section” Piping Specialties”.




3 05 Installation of Supports and Anchors

A. Install supports and anchors in accordance with”Plumbing Piping” section.

3 06 Installation of Cleanouts

A. Install cleanouts in above ground piping and building drain piping as indicated; as required by the American Standard National Plumbing Code; at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 deg.; at minimum intervals of 15 m for piping 100 mm and smaller and 30 m for larger piping; and at base of each vertical soil or waste stack.

B. Install floor and wall cleanout covers for concealed piping. Select type

to match adjacent building finish.

C. Cleanouts on exposed pipes to be installed directly on pipe and those on concealed pipes extended through and terminated flush with finished floor or wall and concealed with floor or wall cleanout covers.

3 07 Installation of Flashing Flanges

A. Install flashing flanges and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing through waterproof membranes.

3 08 Installation Of Vent Flashing Sleeves

A. Install vent flashing sleeves on stacks passing through roof. 3 09 Installation Of Floor Drains

A. Provide floor drains of size and location as indicated on drawings; and type, including features, as specified herein.

B. Install floor drains in accordance with manufacturer’s written

instructions. C. Coordinate with soil and waste piping as necessary to interface floor

drains with drainage piping systems.

D. Floor drains to be carefully set at locations and elevations indicated on the drawings. Set level and square with the floor construction.

E. Floor drains to be provided with deep seal P-traps except where

noted on the drawings or in the specifications.

F. Coordinate flashing work with work of waterproofing and adjoining substrate work.

G. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs

between floor drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

H. Floor drains in floors above grade with membrane waterproofing to be

flashed with 1.8 kg sheet lead and secured with flashing clamps.

I. Position floor drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain.




3 10 Piping Connections To Plumbing Fixtures And Drains

A. Provide soil and waste piping run outs to plumbing fixtures and drains with approved trap, of sizes indicated.

B. Locate piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab

supporting plumbing fixtures or drains. 3 11 Testing

A. Test soil and waste systems in accordance with section ”Plumbing Piping” section.

3 12 Cleaning And Inspection

A. Clean, flush, and inspect soil and waste piping in accordance with Basic Requirements for Plumbing and Fire Fighting", "Pipes and Pipe Fittings” and ”Plumbing Piping” sections.

3 13 Gulley Trap

A. Construction: in situ reinforced concrete, with opening in top recessed to accommodate cast iron manhole cover and frame.

B. Walls: plaster internally with two coats cement and sand (1:3) to total

thickness of 15 mm.

C. Inlet and Outlet: Difference in elevation between inlet and outlet is to be 30 mm. Outlet is to have trap and cleanout.

D. Cover and Frame: Replace if found to rattle under traffic. Plugging,

burning in or filling to obtain tight cover will not be allowed. Recess for cover in concrete is to be accurately made to dimensions of frame. Embed frame in mortar and set frame and cover level and to proper grade.

3 14 Inspection Chambers

A. Construction: In situ reinforced concrete.

B. Access: opening in top with recess to accommodate cast iron cover and frame.

C. Floors: Form by hand with cement mortar to size and shape of sewer.

Changes in sewer size to be gradual and even. Floors to have gradual slope from side walls to central channel. Half pipe inverts may be used in straight through inspection chambers.

D. Inlets: Main and side inlets are to have drop of 50 to 80 mm above

invert of central channel.

E. Walls: Plaster internally with two coats cement and sand (1:3) to total thickness of 15 mm.

F. Steps: Galvanized pipe steps set in place during construction,

properly embedded, beginning 600 mm abbottom and spaced at




approximately 35 mm .

G. Caulk and repair leaks if approved or remove entire work and rebuild at no extra cost.

H. Keep groundwater level below bottom of inspection chamber until

conc.”ete has obtained adequate set.

I. Covers are to fit frames. Replace if found to rattle under traffic. Plugging, burning in or filling to obtain tight covers will not be allowed.

J. Recess in concrete for covers is to be neatly and accurately made to

dimensions of frame. Thoroughly embed frame in mortar and set frame and cover level and to proper grade.

K. Drop Inspection Chamber: Provide where conditions necessitate free

vertical drop exceeding 450 mm. 3 15 Protection of Underground Structures

A. Protect incompleted work from floating. Lines or structures not stable against uplift during construction are to be well braced or otherwise protected.

3 16 Inspection and Testing Of Underground Piping

A. Inspection: Completed underground lines are to be inspected and approved by the Engineer.

B. Testing: as mentioned under ”Plumbing Piping” section.

C. Repair or replace defective work as directed.




Division 15 - Mechanical Work Section 15413 - Storm Water Systems Part 1: General 1 01 Related Documents

I. The project specification sections apply to work of this section. II. “Plumbing Piping “ section apply to work of this section.

1 02 Scope of Work

I. Extent and connect with the existing of storm water systems work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section.

II. Refer to other sections for insulation required in conjunction with storm

water systems; not work of this section.

III. Connection with the existing roof drain system.

IV. Flashings required in conjunction with storm water systems are included as work of this section.

Part 2: Product 2 01 Materials and Products - General

I. Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, and capacities as indicated.

II. Provide roof drain and gutters materials and products of sizes and

types to match piping and equipment connections.

III. Provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in storm water systems; preferably the product of same manufacturer.

2 02 Basic Pipes and Pipe Fittings

I. Provide pipes and pipe fittings complying with “Pipes and Pipe Fittings” and “Plumbing Piping” sections.


I. Provide piping specialties complying with section “ Piping Specialties”, in accordance with the following listing: Pipe Escutcheons Mechanical Sleeve Seals Fire Barrier Penetration Seals Drip Pans Pipe Sleeves




Sleeve Seals 2 04 Basic Supports and Anchors

I. Provide supports and anchors complying with “Supports and Anchors” and “Plumbing Piping “sections.

2 05 Expansion Joints

I. Provide cast-iron body expansion joints with adjustable bronze sleeve, bronze bolts with wing nuts; for vertical installation only.

2 06 Roof Drains and Gutters - General

I. Provide roof drains and gutters of size as indicated on drawings; and type, including features, as specified herein.

II. Roof drains may have threaded or caulked outlets. III. Roof drains to be flashed with 2.7 kg (6 pound) sheet lead and

secured with flashing clamps.

Part 3 - Execution 3 01 Inspection

I. Examine substrates and conditions under which storm water systems are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3 02 Installation Of Above Ground Piping

I. Install storm water piping in accordance with “Pipes and Pipe Fittings” and “Plumbing Piping” sections.

II. Insulate rainwater offsets and bodies of roof drains to prevent condensation.

III. Avoid unnecessary turns and offsets and run storm water piping as direct as possible from storm water drains to vertical stacks.

IV. Lay horizontal pipes at uniform slope of not less than 1 %

3 03 Connection with the Existing System

I. Similar connections with the existing system must be followed. 3 04 Installation of Piping Specialties

I. Install piping specialties in accordance with”Piping Specialties” section. 3 05 Installation of Supports And Anchors

I. Install supports and anchors in accordance with”Supports and Anchors” and ”Plumbing Piping” sections.

3 06 Installation of Roof Drains And Gutters

I. Install roof drains in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and in locations indicated on the drawings.




II. Install roof drains and gutters in a completely watertight manner with the roof. Install ’drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between roof drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated.

III. Coordinate flashing work with work of roofing, water-proofing and

adjoining substrate work.

IV. Coordinate with roofing as necessary to interface roof drains and gutters with steel structure roofing works.

V. Coordinate with storm water systems as necessary to interface drains

with drainage piping systems. VI. Install roof drains and gutters at low points of surface areas to be

drained, or as indicated. 3 07 Testing And Commissioning

I. Test storm water systems in accordance with requirements of this section “Plumbing Piping” section.

3 08 Cleaning And Inspection

I. Clean, flush, and inspect storm water piping in accordance with requirements of “Pipes and Pipe Fittings” and “Plumbing Piping” sections.





Section 15444 - Packaged Booster Pumps

PART 1 - General

1 01 Related Documents A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1 02 SUMMARY

B. This Section includes constant-speed, [simplex] [multiplex], packaged booster pumps for domestic water piping systems.


1. Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Pumps" for domestic water circulation pumps.

1 03 SUBMITTALS

D. Product Data: For each packaged booster pump specified. Include certified performance curves with operating points plotted on curves; and rated capacities of selected models, furnished specialties, and accessories.

E. Shop Drawings: For packaged booster pumps and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.[ Shop Drawings shall be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.]

1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails and equipment mounting frames.

Retain first paragraph and below if required by seismic criteria applicable to Project. Coordinate with Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."

F. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that packaged booster pumps, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.




a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each packaged booster pump to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


H. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of packaged booster pumps and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."

I. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

J. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for piping.

K. Packaged booster pumps shall be listed and labeled as pumping systems by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


L. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.

M. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.

N. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling.

1 06 COORDINATION

O. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2 01 MANUFACTURERS




2 02 CONSTANT-SPEED, SIMPLEX BOOSTER PUMPS


1. Alyan Pump Company.

2. Amtrol Inc.

3. Canariis Corporation.

4. Hydronic Modules Corporation.

5. Paco Pumps, Inc.

6. Thrush Company, Inc.

7. Tigerflow, Inc.

8. Tramco Pump Company.

9. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

C. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, packaged booster pump with pump, piping, valves, sensors, hydropneumatic tank, and controls mounted on skids or base.

D. System Working-Pressure Rating: [125 psig (860 kPa)] [150 psig (1035 kPa)] <Insert other> minimum.

E. Pump: Overhung impeller, close coupled, single stage, end suction, centrifugal. Comply with UL 778 and with HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3.

1. Pump Construction: Bronze fitted.

a. Casing: Radially split, cast iron. b. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, closed,

and keyed to shaft. c. Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Steel shaft, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve.




d. Seal: Mechanical.

F. Motor: Single speed, with oil-lubricated bearings, unless otherwise indicated; and directly mounted to pump casing. Select motor that will not overload through full range of pump performance curve. Comply with Division 15 Section "Motors."

G. Control Valve: Adjustable, automatic, direct-acting pressure regulator on pump discharge.

H. Relief Valve: Adjustable, pressure relief type on pump discharge.

I. Piping: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B), drawn copper water tube; with copper solder-joint pressure fittings, and brazed joints[ or ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded, cast-iron fittings and threaded joints].

J. Valves: Include shutoff valve at each pump suction, and shutoff valve and check valve at each pump discharge.

1. Shutoff Valves: MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze, rising-stem gate valve or MSS SP-110, 600-psig (4135-kPa) minimum CWP, bronze ball valve with ends matching piping.

2. Check Valves: [Spring- or lever-loaded, ]MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze, swing check valve.

K. Sensors: Pressure and flow switches.

L. Dielectric Fittings: Factory-fabricated union assembly; with insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action and to stop corrosion; rated for 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum working pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg C).

M. Control Panel: NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508; automatic for single-pump, constant-speed operation, with load control and protection functions.

1. Mounting and Wiring: Factory installed and connected as an integral part of unit.

2. Enclosure: [NEMA ICS 6] [NEMA 250], [Type 12] <Insert type>.

3. Motor Controller: Full-voltage, combination-magnetic type with undervoltage release feature, motor-circuit-protector-type disconnect, and short-circuit protective device.

a. Control Voltage: [24] [120]-V ac, with integral control power transformer.

4. Motor Overload Protection: Overload relay in each phase.

5. Starting Devices: Hand-off-automatic selector switch in cover of control panel, plus pilot device for automatic control.

6. Instrumentation: Unit suction and discharge pressure gages.

7. Light: Running light for pump.

8. Alarm Signal Device: Sounds alarm when backup pumps are operating.

9. Three subparagraphs below are some available options. Delete those not required and add others to suit Project.




10. High-suction pressure cutout.

11. High-discharge pressure cutout.

12. Remote signal contacts.

N. Hydropneumatic Tank: Precharged, diaphragm or bladder tank.

O. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembling and testing. Protect flanges, pipe openings, and pump nozzles.

P. Capacity and Characteristics:

1. Inlet Pressure: <Insert psig (kPa).>

2. Discharge Pressure: <Insert psig (kPa).>

3. Shutoff Pressure: <Insert psig (kPa).>

4. Inlet Size: <Insert NPS (DN).>

a. Outlet Size: <Insert NPS (DN).>

5. Pump:

a. Capacity: <Insert gpm (L/s).> b. Total Dynamic Head: <Insert feet (kPa).> c. Shutoff Pressure: <Insert psig (kPa).> d. Speed: <Insert rpm.>

6. Control Valve:

a. Minimum Size: <Insert NPS (DN).> b. Maximum Pressure Drop: <Insert psig (kPa).>

7. Motor Horsepower: <Insert value.>

8. Electrical Characteristics:

a. Volts: [120] [240] [277] [480] <Insert value.> b. Phases: [Single] [Three]. c. Hertz: 60. d. Full-Load Amperes: <Insert value.> e. Minimum Circuit Ampacity: <Insert value.> f. Maximum Overcurrent Protection: <Insert value.>

9. Hydropneumatic Tank:

a. Water Volume: <Insert gal. (L)> minimum water-volume capacity. b. Air Precharge: <Insert psig (kPa)>.




2 03 CONSTANT-SPEED, MULTIPLEX BOOSTER PUMPS

Q. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, packaged booster pump with multiple pumps, piping, valves, sensors, and controls on skids or base.

R. System Working-Pressure Rating: [150 psig (1035 kPa)] [175 psig (1200 kPa)] <Insert other> minimum.

S. Pump Arrangement: [Duplex, with two equal-size pumps] [Triplex, with one small lead and two large equal-size lag main pumps] [Triplex, with three equal-size pumps] <Insert other>.

T. Pumps: Overhung impeller, close coupled, single stage, end suction, centrifugal. Comply with UL 778 and HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3.


a. Alyan Pump Company. b. Armstrong Darling, Inc. c. Aurora Pump; Pentair Pump Group (The). d. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; ITT Industries. e. Canariis Corporation. f. Federal Pump Corp. g. Flowtronex PSI, Inc. h. Hydronic Modules Corporation. i. Metropolitan Industries, Inc. j. Paco Pumps, Inc. k. Sterling Peerless; Sterling Fluid Systems Group. l. SynchroFlo, Inc. m. Thrush Company, Inc. n. Tigerflow, Inc. o. Tramco Pump Company. p. Wood, The John Co.; Systems Div. q. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

2. Each Pump:

a. Orientation: Mounted [horizontally] [horizontally or vertically] [vertically]. b. Construction: Bronze fitted.

1) Casing: Radially split, cast iron. 2) Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced,

closed, and keyed to shaft. 3) Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Steel shaft, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve. 4) Seal: Mechanical.

U. Pumps: Overhung impeller assembly, separately coupled, vertically mounted, multistage, in-line, centrifugal. Comply with UL 778 and HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3.


a. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; ITT Industries. b. Canariis Corporation. c. Grundfos Pumps Corp.




d. Paco Pumps, Inc. e. Tigerflow, Inc. f. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

2. Each Pump:

a. Construction: Stainless-steel fitted.

1) Casing: Cast-iron base and head sections. 2) Impellers, Diffusers, and Discharge Sleeve: Stainless steel. 3) Shaft: Stainless steel. 4) Seal: Mechanical.

b. Coupling: Rigid type.

V. Pumps: Overhung impeller, close or rigid coupled, vertically mounted, single stage, in-line, centrifugal. Comply with UL 778 and HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3.


a. Armstrong Darling, Inc. b. Flowtronex PSI, Inc. c. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

2. Each Pump:

a. Construction: Bronze fitted.

1) Casing: Radially split with wear rings. 2) Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced,

closed, and keyed to shaft. 3) Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Stainless-steel[ or steel] shaft with copper-alloy

shaft sleeve. 4) Seal: Mechanical, with carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring,

ceramic seat, and rubber bellows and gasket. Include water slinger on shaft between motor and seal.

5) Bearings: Oil lubricated; bronze-journal or ball type.

W. Pumps: Impeller between bearings, separately coupled, horizontally mounted on baseplate, single stage, axially split case, centrifugal. Comply with UL 778 and HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3.


a. Aurora Pump; Pentair Pump Group (The). b. Metropolitan Industries, Inc. c. Sterling Peerless; Sterling Fluid Systems Group. d. Tigerflow, Inc. e. Wood, The John Co.; Systems Div. f. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

2. Each Pump:

a. Construction: Bronze fitted.




1) Casing: Axially split. 2) Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced,

closed, and keyed to shaft. 3) Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Stainless-steel[ or steel] shaft with copper-alloy

shaft sleeves. 4) Bearings: Ball type. 5) Seals: Mechanical.

b. Shaft Coupling: Flexible with guard.

X. Pumps: Vertical, multistage can. Comply with UL 778 and HI 2.1-2.2.


a. Aurora Pump; Pentair Pump Group (The). b. Canariis Corporation. c. Flowtronex PSI, Inc. d. Hydronic Modules Corporation. e. Metropolitan Industries, Inc. f. Paco Pumps, Inc. g. Sterling Peerless; Sterling Fluid Systems Group. h. SynchroFlo, Inc. i. Tigerflow, Inc. j. Wood, The John Co.; Systems Div. k. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

2. Construction: Bronze fitted.

a. Casing: Coated steel. b. Impellers: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, closed

or semiopen, and keyed to shaft. c. Bowls: Coated cast iron. d. Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Steel shaft with copper-alloy shaft sleeves.

3. Coupling: Spool type.

Y. Motors: Single speed, with oil-lubricated bearings, unless otherwise indicated. Select motor that will not overload through full range of pump performance curve. Comply with Division 15 Section "Motors."

Z. Control Valves: Adjustable, automatic, [direct-acting] [pilot-operated] pressure regulator on each pump discharge.

AA. Relief Valves: Adjustable, pressure relief type on pump discharge.

BB. Piping: ASME B31.9 for piping materials and installation.

1. NPS 4 (DN 100) and Smaller: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B), drawn copper water tube; with copper solder-joint pressure fittings, and brazed joints[ or ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded, cast-iron fittings and threaded joints].

2. NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded, cast-iron fittings and threaded joints.




3. Header End Connections:

a. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded. b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged.

4. Piping Option: Piping, including valves and other components, may have grooved ends for grooved joints.

CC. Valves: Include shutoff valve at each pump suction, and shutoff valve and check valve at each pump discharge.

1. Shutoff Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze rising-stem gate valve or MSS SP-110, 600-psig (4135-kPa) minimum CWP, bronze ball valve with ends matching piping.

2. Shutoff Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125, bronze-trim, OS&Y, cast-iron gate valve with flanged ends or MSS SP-67, Type I for tight shutoff, 175-psig (1200-kPa) CWP, single-flanged, cast-iron butterfly valve.

3. Verify that option in first subparagraph below is available for selected check valves if required.

4. Check Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: [Spring- or lever-loaded, ]MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze, swing check valve.

5. Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Spring- or lever-loaded, MSS SP-71, Class 125, bronze-trim, cast-iron, swing check valve.

DD. Sensors: Pressure and flow switches.

EE. Dielectric Fittings: With insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action and to stop corrosion.

1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Factory-fabricated union assembly, for 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum working pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg C).

2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly; for 150- or 300-psig (1035- or 2070-kPa) minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

FF. Control Panel: Factory installed and connected as an integral part of unit complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508; automatic for multiple-pump, constant-speed operation, with load control and protection functions.

1. Enclosure: [NEMA ICS 6] [NEMA 250], [Type 12] <Insert type>.

2. Motor Controller: Full-voltage, combination-magnetic type with undervoltage release feature, motor-circuit-protector-type disconnect, and short-circuit protective device.

a. Control Voltage: [24] [120]-V ac, with integral control power transformer.

3. Motor Overload Protection: Overload relay in each phase.




4. Starting Devices: Hand-off-automatic selector switch in cover of control panel, plus pilot device for automatic control.

a. Duplex, Automatic, Alternating Starter: Switches lead pump to lag main pump and to two-pump operation.

b. Triplex, Sequence (Lead-Lag-Lag) Starter: Switches lead pump to one lag main pump and to three-pump operation.

5. Instrumentation: Unit suction and discharge pressure gages.

6. Lights: Running light for each pump.

7. Alarm Signal Device: Sounds alarm when backup pumps are operating.

8. Three subparagraphs below are some available options. Delete those not required and add others to suit Project.

9. High-suction pressure cutout.

10. High-discharge pressure cutout.

11. Remote signal contacts.

GG. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembling and testing. Protect flanges, pipe openings, and pump nozzles.

HH. Capacity and Characteristics:

1. System Capacity: <Insert gpm (L/s).>

2. Inlet Pressure: <Insert psig (kPa).>

3. Discharge Pressure: <Insert psig (kPa).>

4. Shutoff Pressure: <Insert psig (kPa).>

5. Inlet and Outlet Header Size: <Insert NPS (DN).>

6. Lead Pump:

a. Capacity: <Insert gpm (L/s).> b. Total Dynamic Head: <Insert feet (kPa).> c. Speed: <Insert rpm.> d. Control Valve:

1) Minimum Size: <Insert NPS (DN).> 2) Maximum Pressure Drop: <Insert psig (kPa).>

e. Motor Horsepower: <Insert value.> f. Electrical Characteristics:

1) Volts: [120] [240] [277] [480] <Insert value>. 2) Phases: [Single] [Three].




3) Hertz: 60.

7. Each of [Two] [Three] <Insert number> Lag Pumps:

a. Capacity: <Insert gpm (L/s).> b. Total Dynamic Head: <Insert feet (kPa).> c. Speed: <Insert rpm.> d. Control Valve:

1) Minimum Size: <Insert NPS (DN).> 2) Maximum Pressure Drop: <Insert psig (kPa).>

e. Motor Horsepower: <Insert value.> f. Electrical Characteristics:


8. Unit Electrical Characteristics:

a. Full-Load Amperes: <Insert value.> b. Minimum Circuit Ampacity: <Insert value.> c. Maximum Overcurrent Protection: <Insert value.>

2 04 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

II. [Available ]Manufacturers:


JJ. Description: Corrugated, bronze inner tubing covered with bronze wire braid. Include copper-tube ends or bronze flanged ends, braze-welded to tubing. Include [150-psig (1035-kPa)] [175-psig (1200-kPa)] <Insert other> minimum working-pressure rating and ends according to the following:

1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded. Provide flanged ends if pump has flanged connections.

2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged.




2 05 BUILDING-AUTOMATION-SYSTEM INTERFACE

KK. Provide auxiliary contacts in pump controllers for interface to building automation system. Include the following:

1. On-off status of each pump.

2. Alarm status.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3 01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for packaged booster pumps to verify actual locations of connections before booster pump installation.

3 02 CONCRETE BASES

B. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for packaged booster pumps. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

Revise subparagraphs below based on installed equipment. Indicate dowel-rod quantity, size, and spacing on Drawings.



3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be imbedded.

4. Install anchor bolts to elevation required for proper attachment to supported equipment.


3 03 BOOSTER PUMP INSTALLATION

D. Install packaged booster pumps level on concrete bases with access for periodic maintenance including removal of pumps, motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.

1. Do not dismantle packaged booster pumps or remove individual components.

E. Vibration Isolation: Install on spring isolators with minimum deflection of <Insert deflection>. Vibration isolation devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."




F. Support connected domestic water piping so weight of piping is not supported by packaged booster pumps.

3 04 CONNECTIONS

G. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

H. Connect domestic water piping to packaged booster pumps. Install suction and discharge pipe equal to or greater than size of unit suction and discharge [headers] [piping].

1. Install flexible connectors on piping connections to unit suction and discharge [headers] [piping]. Install flexible connectors same size as piping.

2. Retain first subparagraph below if required.

3. Install shutoff valves on piping connections to each booster pump suction and discharge [headers] [piping]. Install ball, butterfly, or gate valves same size as suction and discharge [headers] [piping]. General-duty valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."

4. Install union or flanged connections on pump suction and discharge [headers] [piping] at connection to domestic water piping.

5. Install piping adjacent to packaged booster pumps to allow service and maintenance.

I. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

J. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."

3 05 STARTUP SERVICE

K. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the following startup service:

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Check piping connections for tightness.

3. Clean strainers if any.

4. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application.

5. <Insert additional startup steps if any.>

L. Perform the following startup checks for each pump of packaged booster pump unit before starting:

1. Verify bearing lubrication.

2. Prime pumps by opening suction valves and closing discharge valves, and prepare pumps for operation.




3. Start motors.

4. Open discharge valves slowly.

5. Adjust settings.

6. <Insert additional startup checks if any.>

M. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting packaged booster pumps to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3 06 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION

N. Install identifying equipment markers and equipment signs on booster pumps. Labeling and identification materials are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."

3 07 DEMONSTRATION

O. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged booster pumps. Refer to Division 1 Section "[Closeout Procedures] [Demonstration and Training]."




Davison 15 - Mechanical Work

Section 15446 - Sump Pumps

PART 1 - General

Related Documents


1 01 Summary

B. This Section includes the following sump pumps and accessories, inside the building, for building storm drainage systems:

1. Wet-pit-mounted, vertical sump pumps. 2. Submersible sump pumps. 3. Sump pump [basins] [basins and pits] [pits]. 4. Packaged, [pedestal] [pedestal and submersible] [submersible], drainage pump units.


1. Division 15 Section "Sewage Pumps" for application in sanitary drainage systems.

1 02 Submittals

D. Product Data: For each type and size of sump pump specified. Include certified performance curves with operating points plotted on curves, and rated capacities of selected models, furnished specialties, and accessories.

E. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each sump pump to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


G. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of sump pumps and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."




H. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

1 04 Delivery, Storage, And Handling

I. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.

J. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.

K. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling.

1 05 Coordination

L. Coordinate size and location of concrete [bases] [bases and pits] [pits]. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.

PART 2 - Products

2 01 Manufacturers




2 02 Wet-Pit-Mounted, Vertical Sump Pumps


1. Alyan Pump Company. 2. Armstrong Pumps Inc. 3. Aurora Pump; Pentair Pump Group (The). 4. Chicago Pump Company; a division of Yeomans Chicago Corporation. 5. Deming Pumps; Crane Pumps & Systems. 6. Federal Pump Corp. 7. Ingersoll-Dresser Pumps. 8. Paco Pumps, Inc. 9. Sterling Peerless; Sterling Fluid Systems Group. 10. Swaby Manufacturing Co. 11. Tramco Pump Company. 12. Vertiflo Pump Company.




13. Weil Pump Company, Inc. 14. Weinman Div.; Crane Pumps & Systems. 15. Yeomans Chicago Corporation. 16. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

C. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, single-stage, centrifugal, end-suction sump pumps complying with UL 778. Vertical, separately coupled, suspended pumps complying with HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3 for wet-pit-volute sump pumps.

1. Pump Arrangement: [Simplex] [Duplex] [Multiplex]. 2. Casing: Cast iron, with screened inlet and threaded connection for NPS 2 (DN 50) and

smaller and flanged connection for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger discharge piping. 3. Impeller: [ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class No. 25 A or higher cast iron] [ASTM A 532/A 532M,

abrasion-resistant cast iron] [ASTM B 584, cast bronze]; statically and dynamically balanced[ nonclog design]; overhung, single suction, keyed and secured to shaft.

4. Pump Shaft and Sleeve Bearings: [Stainless-steel] [Stainless-steel or steel] [Steel] shaft with bronze sleeve bearings. Include oil-lubricated, intermediate sleeve bearings at 48-inch (1200-mm) maximum intervals if basin depth is more than 48 inches (1200 mm), and grease-lubricated, ball-type thrust bearings.

5. Pump and Motor Shaft Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft misalignment.

D. Pump Discharge Piping: Manufacturer's standard galvanized-steel or bronze pipe.

E. [Basin] [Pit] Cover: Cast iron or steel with bituminous coating and strong enough to support pumps, motors, and controls. See Part 2 "Sump Pump [Basins] [Pits]" Article for requirements.

F. Cover Shaft Seal: Stuffing box, with graphite-impregnated braided-yarn rings and bronze packing gland.

G. Motor: Single speed; grease-lubricated ball bearings. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors" with built-in thermal-overload protection appropriate for motor size and duty.

1. Mounting: On vertical, cast-iron pedestal.

H. Controls: NEMA 250, [Type 1] <Insert other> enclosure, pedestal-mounted float switches; with floats, float rods, and rod buttons.[ Include automatic alternator to alternate operation of pump units on successive cycles and to operate multiple units if one pump cannot handle load.]


2. High-Water Alarm: Cover-mounted, [compression-probe] [mechanical-float-switch] [mercury-float-switch] [micropressure-switch] alarm, with electric bell; 120-V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell.

I. Capacity and Characteristics:


a. Capacity: <Insert gpm (L/minute).> b. Total Dynamic Head: <Insert feet (kPa).> c. Speed: <Insert rpm.>




d. Discharge Pipe Size: <Insert NPS (DN).> e. Motor Horsepower: <Insert value.> f. Electrical Characteristics:

1) Volts: [120] [240] [277] [480] <Insert value.> 2) Phases: [Single] [Three]. 3) Hertz: 60.



4. Alternator Control Required: [Yes] [No].

2 03 Submersible Sump Pumps

J. [Available ]Manufacturers:

1. ABS Pumps, Inc. 2. Aermotor Pumps, Inc. 3. Barnes; Crane Pumps & Systems. 4. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; ITT Industries. 5. BJM Corporation. 6. EBARA International Corporation; Standard Pump Division. 7. Federal Pump Corp. 8. Gorman-Rupp Company (The). 9. Goulds Pumps; ITT Industries. 10. Grundfos Pumps Corp. 11. Liberty Pumps. 12. Little Giant Pump Co. 13. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. 14. Metropolitan Industries, Inc. 15. Myers, F. E.; Pentair Pump Group (The). 16. Paco Pumps, Inc. 17. Stancor, Inc. 18. Sta-Rite Industries, Inc. 19. Swaby Manufacturing Co. 20. Weil Pump Company, Inc. 21. Weinman Div.; Crane Pumps & Systems. 22. Zoeller Company. 23. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

K. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, [simplex] [duplex] <Insert other>, single-stage, centrifugal, end-suction, submersible, direct-connected sump pumps complying with UL 778 and HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3 for submersible sump pumps.

L. Casing: Cast iron; with cast-iron inlet strainer, legs that elevate pump to permit flow into impeller, and vertical discharge with companion flange for piping connection.




M. Impeller: [ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class No. 25 A or higher cast iron] [ASTM A 532/A 532M, abrasion-resistant cast iron] [ASTM B 584, cast bronze] [stainless steel]; statically and dynamically balanced, semiopen nonclog design, overhung, single suction, keyed and secured to shaft.

N. Casing: Stainless steel; with stainless-steel inlet strainer, legs that elevate pump to permit flow into impeller, and vertical discharge with companion flange suitable for piping connection.

O. Impeller: Stainless steel or other corrosion-resistant material.

P. Casing and Impeller: Cast-iron casing with metal inlet strainer and brass, bronze, or cast-iron impeller.

Q. Casing and Impeller: Cast-iron or plastic casing with inlet strainer and metal or plastic impeller.

R. Pump and Motor Shaft: [Stainless steel] [Steel], with factory-sealed, grease-lubricated ball bearings[ and double-mechanical seals].

S. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type, with built-in overload protection; three-conductor waterproof power cable of length required, and with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."

1. Moisture-Sensing Probe: Internal moisture sensor with moisture alarm.

T. Pump Discharge Piping: Factory or field fabricated, [ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, galvanized-steel pipe] [bronze pipe] [copper tube] <Insert other pipe material>.

U. [Basin] [Pit] Cover: Cast iron or steel with bituminous coating and strong enough to support controls. See Part 2 "Sump Pump [Basins] [Pits]" Article for other requirements.

V. Controls: NEMA 250, [Type 1] <Insert other> enclosure, pedestal-mounted float switch; with float, float rod, and rod buttons.

W. Controls: NEMA 250, [Type 1] <Insert other> enclosure, pedestal-mounted float switch; with float, float rod, and rod buttons. Include automatic alternator to alternate operation of pump units on successive cycles and to operate multiple units if one pump cannot handle load.

X. Controls: NEMA 250, [Type 1] <Insert other> enclosure, pedestal mounted unless wall mounting is indicated; with two [mechanical- or mercury-float or micropressure] [mechanical-float] [mercury-float] [micropressure] switches in NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosures; mounting rod; and electric cables.

Y. Controls: NEMA 250, [Type 1] <Insert other> enclosure, pedestal mounted unless wall mounting is indicated; with three [mechanical- or mercury-float or micropressure] [mechanical-float] [mercury-float] [micropressure] switches in NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosures; mounting rod; and electric cables. Include automatic alternator to alternate operation of pump units on successive cycles and to operate multiple units if one pump cannot handle load.


2. High-Water Alarm: Cover-mounted, compression-probe alarm, with electric bell; 120-V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell.

3. High-Water Alarm: Rod-mounted, NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosure with [mechanical- or mercury-float or micropressure] [mechanical-float] [mercury-float] [micropressure]-switch




alarm matching control and electric bell; 120-V ac, with transformer and contacts for remote alarm bell.

Z. Controls: NEMA 250, Type 6, 120-V ac, float switch, mounted on discharge piping.

AA. Capacity and Characteristics:


a. Capacity: <Insert gpm (L/minute).> b. Total Dynamic Head: <Insert feet (kPa).> c. Speed: <Insert rpm.> d. Discharge Pipe Size: <Insert NPS (DN).> e. Motor Horsepower: <Insert value.> f. Electrical Characteristics:

1) Volts: [120] [240] [277] [480] <Insert value.> 2) Phases: [Single] [Three]. 3) Hertz: 60.



4. Alternator Control Required: [Yes] [No].

2 04 Sump Pump Basins

BB. Description: Factory fabricated basin with sump, pipe connections, and separate cover.

CC. Sump: Fabricate watertight, with sidewall openings for pipe connections.

1. Material: [Cast iron] [Cast iron or fiberglass] [Fiberglass] <Insert other>. 2. Reinforcement: Mounting plates for pumps, fittings, and accessories. 3. Anchor Flange: Same material as or compatible with sump, cast in or attached to sump,

in location and of size required to anchor basin in concrete slab.

DD. Cover: Fabricate with openings having gaskets, seals, and bushings, for access to pumps, pump shafts, control rods, discharge piping, vent connections, and power cables.

1. Material: [Cast iron] [Cast iron or steel with bituminous coating] [Steel with bituminous coating].

2. Reinforcement: Steel or cast iron, capable of supporting foot traffic for basins installed in foot-traffic areas.

EE. Capacity and Characteristics:

1. Material: [Cast iron] [Fiberglass] <Insert other>.




2. Capacity: <Insert gal (L).> 3. Diameter: <Insert inches (mm).> 4. Depth: <Insert inches (mm).> 5. Inlet No. 1:


6. Inlet No. 2:

a. Drainage Pipe Size: <Insert NPS (DN).> b. Bottom of Sump to Centerline: <Insert inches (mm).> c. Type: [Flange] [Hubbed] [Threaded] outside.

7. Inlet No. 3:


8. Sidewall Outlet:

a. Discharge Pipe Size: <Insert NPS (DN).> b. Bottom of Sump to Centerline: <Insert inches (mm).> c. Type: [Hubbed inside] [Hubbed outside] <Insert other>.

9. Cover:

a. Material: [Cast iron] [Steel with bituminous coating]. b. Diameter: <Insert inches (mm).> c. Manhole Required: [Yes] [No]. d. Vent Size: <Insert NPS (DN).>

2 05 Sump Pump Pits

FF. Description: Concrete pit with sump, pipe connections, curb frame, and separate cover.

GG. Sump: Construct of watertight, cast-in-place, reinforced concrete with sidewall openings for pipe connections. Cast-in-place concrete, formwork, and reinforcement are specified in Division 3 Section "[Cast-in-Place Concrete] [Cast-in-Place Concrete (Limited Applications)]."

1. Pipe Connections: Sleeved openings large enough for mechanical sleeve seals for drainage piping. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods," and drainage piping is specified in Division 15 Section "Storm Drainage Piping."

HH. Curb Frame and Cover:

1. Curb Frame Material: Galvanized steel or steel with bituminous coating.




a. Pattern: [Angle-cross-section shape with flat top surface] [Z-cross-section shape with raised outer rim of height matching cover, for recessed mounting having installed cover flush with top of floor slab].

2. Cover: Fabricate with openings having gaskets, seals, and bushings, for access to pumps, pump shafts, control rods, discharge piping, vent connections, and power cables.


b. Reinforcement: Steel or cast iron, capable of supporting foot traffic for pits installed in foot-traffic areas.

II. Capacity and Characteristics:

1. Capacity: <Insert gal (L).> 2. Inside Dimensions: <Insert inches (mm).> 3. Depth: <Insert inches (mm).> 4. Inlet No. 1:

a. Drainage Pipe Size: <Insert NPS (DN).> b. Bottom of Sump to Centerline: <Insert inches (mm).>

5. Inlet No. 2:


6. Inlet No. 3:


7. Sidewall Outlet:

a. Discharge Pipe Size: <Insert NPS (DN).> b. Bottom of Sump to Centerline: <Insert inches (mm).>

8. Curb Frame:

a. Material: [Galvanized] [Bituminous-coated] steel. b. Pattern: <Insert pattern.>

9. Cover:

a. Material: [Cast iron] [Steel with bituminous coating]. b. Dimensions: <Insert inches (mm).> c. Manhole Required: [Yes] [No]. d. Vent Size: <Insert NPS (DN).>




2 06 Packaged Drainage Pump Units

JJ. Pedestal Units: Factory-assembled and -tested, single-stage, centrifugal, end-suction, automatic-operation, freestanding drainage pump unit.


a. Aermotor Pumps, Inc. b. American Machine & Tool Co. c. Goulds Pumps; ITT Industries. d. Liberty Pumps. e. Little Giant Pump Co. f. Myers, F. E.; Pentair Pump Group (The). g. Sta-Rite Industries, Inc. h. Zoeller Company. i. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

2. Pump Body: Corrosion-resistant material. 3. Impeller: [Aluminum or brass] [Aluminum, brass, or plastic]. 4. Motor: With built-in overload protection and mounted vertically on sump pump column.


inches (1830 mm), with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump.

6. Control: Float switch.

KK. Submersible Units: Factory-assembled and -tested, single-stage, centrifugal, end-suction, automatic-operation, submersible, drainage pump unit.


a. ABS Pumps, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; ITT Industries. c. Goulds Pumps; ITT Industries. d. Grundfos Pumps Corp. e. Liberty Pumps. f. Little Giant Pump Co. g. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. h. Myers, F. E.; Pentair Pump Group (The). i. Sta-Rite Industries, Inc. j. Zoeller Company. k. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

2. Pump Body: Metal. 3. Impeller: Brass. 4. Pump Body: Plastic. 5. Impeller: Plastic. 6. Pump Seals: Mechanical type. 7. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type, with built-in overload protection.


inches (1830 mm), with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump.

9. Control: Motor-mounted float switch.




10. Basin: Plastic.

a. Capacity: [2 gal (7.6 L)] [5 gal (18.9 L)] <Insert other> minimum. b. Inlet Connection: [NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40)] <Insert other> minimum.

LL. Capacity and Characteristics:

1. Capacity: <Insert gpm (L/minute).> 2. Total Dynamic Head: <Insert feet (kPa).> 3. Speed: <Insert rpm.> 4. Discharge Pipe Size: <Insert NPS (DN).> 5. Motor Horsepower: <Insert value.> 6. Electrical Characteristics:

a. Volts: [120] [240] [277] [480] <Insert value.> b. Phases: [Single] [Three]. c. Hertz: 60. d. Full-Load Amperes: <Insert value.> e. Minimum Circuit Ampacity: <Insert value.> f. Maximum Overcurrent Protection: <Insert value.>

7. Basin:

a. Material: Plastic. b. Capacity: [2 gal (7.6 L)] [5 gal (18.9 L)] <Insert other> minimum. c. Inlet Connection: [NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40)] <Insert other> minimum.

2 07 Flexible Connectors

MM. [Available ]Manufacturers:


NN. Description: [125-psig (860-kPa)] <Insert other> minimum working-pressure rating and ends matching pump connection:

1. Bronze Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, bronze inner tubing covered with bronze wire braid. Include copper-tube ends or bronze flanged ends, braze welded to tubing.

2. Stainless-Steel Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-steel inner tubing covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include stainless-steel nipples or flanges, welded to tubing.




2 08 Building Automation System Interface

OO. Provide auxiliary contacts in pump controllers for interface to building automation system. Include the following:

1. On-off status of each pump. 2. Alarm status.

PART 3 - Execution

3 01 Examination

A. Examine roughing-in of plumbing piping to verify actual locations of storm drainage piping connections before sump pump installation.

3 02 Concrete

B. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for pumps and controllers. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."






3 03 Sump Pump Installation

D. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."

E. Install sump pumps according to applicable requirements in HI 1.4.

F. Install pumps and arrange to provide access for maintenance including removal of motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.

G. Suspend wet-pit-mounted, vertical sump pumps from [basin] [basin and pit] [pit] covers. Make direct connections to storm drainage piping.

H. Set submersible sump pumps on [basin] [basin or pit] [pit] floor. Make direct connections to storm drainage piping.

I. Install sump pump basins and connect to drainage piping. Brace interior of basins according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent distortion or collapse during concrete placement.




Set basin cover and fasten to basin top flange. Install cover so top surface is flush with finished floor.

J. Construct sump pump pits and connect to drainage piping. Set pit curb frame recessed in and anchored to concrete. Fasten pit cover to pit curb flange. Install cover so top surface is flush with finished floor.

K. Install packaged, pedestal, drainage pump units and make direct connection to storm drainage piping.

L. Install packaged, submersible, drainage pump unit basins on floor or concrete base unless recessed installation is indicated. Make direct connections to storm drainage piping.

M. Support piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps.

3 04 Connections

N. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Storm Drainage Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

O. Install piping adjacent to sump pumps to allow service and maintenance.

P. Connect storm drainage piping to pumps. Install discharge piping equal to or greater than size of pump discharge piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Storm Drainage Piping."

1. Install flexible connectors adjacent to pumps in discharge piping. 2. Install check and shutoff valves on discharge piping from each pump. Install unions on

pumps having threaded pipe connections. Install valves same size as connected piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves for drainage piping.

Q. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

R. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."

3 05 Startup Service

S. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Verify bearing lubrication. 3. Disconnect couplings and check motors for proper direction of rotation. 4. Verify that each pump is free to rotate by hand. If pump is bound or drags, do not

operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected. 5. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application. 6. <Insert additional startup steps if any.>

T. Start pumps without exceeding safe motor power:

1. Start motors. 2. Open discharge valves slowly. 3. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors.




U. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

V. Remove and replace damaged and malfunctioning components.

1. Pump Controls: Set pump controls for automatic start, stop, and alarm operation as required for system application.

2. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated, or if not indicated, for normal operation.

W. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3 06 Demonstration

X. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain[ controls and] pumps. Refer to Division 1 Section "[Closeout Procedures] [Demonstration and Training]."





Section 15450 – Potable-Water Storage Tanks

PART 1 - GENERAL

1 01 Related Documents


1 02 SUMMARY

B. This Section includes potable-water storage tanks and related accessories for indoor installation.

1 03 DEFINITIONS

C. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

D. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.

E. LDPE: Low-density polyethylene plastic.

F. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

1 04 SUBMITTALS

G. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. Indicate dimensions, wall thickness, insulation, finishes and coatings, required clearances, methods of assembly of components, and piping connections.

H. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that indicated steel, potable-water storage tanks, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."









I. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that potable-water storage tanks comply with requirements.

J. Source quality-control test reports.

K. Purging and disinfecting reports.


L. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of potable-water storage tanks and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."

M. ASME Compliance for Steel Tanks: Fabricate and label steel, potable-water storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, where indicated.

N. ASME Compliance for FRP Tanks: Fabricate and label FRP, potable-water storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section X, where indicated.

O. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic potable-water storage tanks and components. Include appropriate NSF marking.

P. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects, Sections 1 to 9," for potable-water storage tanks. Include appropriate NSF marking.

1 06 COORDINATION

Q. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.

Part 2: PRODUCTS

2 01 MANUFACTURERS

R. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:






2 02 STEEL, PRESSURE, POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS

S. [Available ]Manufacturers:

1. Adamson Global Technology Corporation. 2. Aldrich Co. 3. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. 4. Cemline Corporation. 5. GSW Water Heating Company. 6. HESco Industries, Inc. 7. Lochinvar Corp. 8. Precision Parts Corp. 9. PVI Industries, LLC. 10. Raypak, Inc. 11. RBI Water Heaters; A Mestek, Inc. Company. 12. RECO USA. 13. Smith, A. O. Water Products Co. 14. State Industries, Inc. 15. Weben Jarco. 16. Wessels Co. 17. Wood, John Co. 18. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

T. Description: Steel, [horizontal] [vertical] pressure-rated tank with cylindrical sidewalls.

U. Fabricate supports and attachments to tank with reinforcement strong enough to resist tank movement during seismic event when tank supports are anchored to building structure.

V. Construction: [ASME code, steel] [Steel], constructed with nontoxic welded joints, for [125-psig (860-kPa)] [150-psig (1035-kPa)] <Insert other> working pressure.

W. Manhole: Watertight, for tank more than [36 inches (915 mm)] <Insert dimension> in diameter; same pressure rating as tank.

X. Tappings: Factory-fabricated[ stainless] steel, welded to tank[ before testing and labeling].

1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: ASME B1.20.1, with female thread. 2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: ASME B16.5, flanged.

Y. Specialties and Accessories: Include tappings in tank and the following:

1. Pressure relief valve. 2. Pressure gage. 3. Thermometer. 4. Air-charging connection. 5. Gage glass, brass fittings, compression stops, and gage-glass guard.




Z. Horizontal Tank Supports: Factory-fabricated steel saddles, welded to tank[ before testing and labeling].

AA. Vertical Tank Supports: Factory-fabricated steel legs or steel skirt, welded to tank[ before testing and labeling].

BB. Tank Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.

1. Lining Material: [Cement] [Copper] <Insert material>. 2. Coating: [Epoxy resin] [Galvanized] [Glass] [Nickel] <Insert coating>.

CC. Exterior Coating: [Galvanized] [Manufacturer's standard enamel paint] [Primer paint] <Insert coating>.

2 03 STEEL, NONPRESSURE, POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS

DD. [Available ]Manufacturers:

1. Adamson Global Technology Corporation. 2. Highland Tank & Mfg. Co. 3. Peabody TecTank, Inc. 4. RECO USA. 5. Steel Tank and Fabricating Co., Inc. 6. Wood, John Co. 7. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

EE. Description: Steel, [horizontal] [vertical] nonpressure-rated tank with cylindrical sidewalls.

FF. Fabricate supports and attachments to tank with reinforcement strong enough to resist tank movement during seismic event when tank supports are anchored to building structure.

GG. Construction: Steel, constructed with nontoxic welded joints.

HH. Manhole: Watertight, for tank more than [36 inches (915 mm)] <Insert dimension> in diameter.

II. Cover for Open Tank: [Plastic] [Steel, with lining same as or similar to tank lining and] with shape that encloses top of tank.

JJ. Tappings: Factory-fabricated[ stainless] steel, welded to tank.


KK. Specialties and Accessories: Include tappings in the tank and the following:

1. Vacuum relief valve. 2. Free air vent with insect screen. 3. Thermometer. 4. Gage glass, brass fittings, compression stops, and gage-glass guard.




LL. Horizontal Tank Supports: Factory-fabricated steel saddles, welded to tank[ before testing and labeling].

MM. Vertical Tank Supports: Factory-fabricated steel legs or steel skirt, welded to tank[ before testing and labeling].

NN. Tank Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.


OO. Exterior Coating: [Galvanized] [Manufacturer's standard enamel paint] [Primer paint] <Insert coating>.

2 04 STEEL, FLOATING-WAFER, PRESSURE, POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS

PP. [Available ]Manufacturers:

1. Cemline Corporation. 2. State Industries, Inc. 3. Wood, John Co. 4. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

QQ. Description: Steel, vertical, pressure-rated tank with cylindrical sidewalls and with floating-wafer separator.

RR. Fabricate supports and attachments to tank with reinforcement strong enough to resist tank movement during seismic event when tank supports are anchored to building structure.

SS. Construction: [ASME code, steel] [Steel], constructed with nontoxic welded joints, for [125-psig (860-kPa)] [150-psig (1035-kPa)] <Insert other> working pressure.

TT. Manhole: Watertight, for tank more than [36 inches (915 mm)] <Insert dimension> in diameter; same pressure rating as tank.

UU. Floating Wafer: Nontoxic plastic, of diameter to match tank.

VV. Tappings: Factory-fabricated[ stainless] steel, welded to tank[ before testing and labeling].


WW. Specialties and Accessories: Include tappings in tank and the following:





XX. Vertical Tank Supports: Factory-fabricated steel legs or steel skirt, welded to tank[ before testing and labeling].

YY. Tank Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.


ZZ. Exterior Coating: [Galvanized] [Manufacturer's standard enamel paint] [Primer paint] <Insert coating>.

2 05 STEEL, PRECHARGED, PRESSURE, POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS

AAA. Steel, Precharged, Diaphragm, Water Storage Tanks:


a. AMTROL, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. Flexcon Industries; Plumbing & Heating Division. d. Myers, F. E.. e. Smith, A. O.; Aqua-Air Div. f. State Industries, Inc. g. Taco, Inc. h. Wessels Co. i. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

2. Description: Steel, vertical, pressured-rated tank with cylindrical sidewalls and with air-charging valve and air precharge.

3. Fabricate supports and attachments to tank with reinforcement strong enough to resist tank movement during seismic event when tank supports are anchored to building structure.

4. Operation: Factory-installed, butyl-rubber diaphragm.

BBB. Steel, Precharged, Bladder, Water Storage Tanks:


a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Taco, Inc. c. Wessels Co. d. Wood, John Co. e. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

2. Description: Steel, vertical, pressured-rated tank with cylindrical sidewalls and with air-charging valve and air precharge.

3. Fabricate supports and attachments to tank with reinforcement strong enough to resist tank movement during seismic event when tank supports are anchored to building structure.

4. Operation: Factory-installed, butyl-rubber bladder.




CCC. Construction: [ASME code, steel] [Steel], constructed with nontoxic welded joints, for [125-psig (860-kPa)] [150-psig (1035-kPa)] <Insert other> working pressure.

DDD. Tappings: Factory-fabricated[ stainless] steel, welded to tank[ before testing and labeling].


EEE. Specialties and Accessories: Include tappings in tank and the following:

1. Pressure gage. 2. <Insert required options.>

FFF. Vertical Tank Supports: Factory-fabricated steel legs or steel skirt, welded to tank[ before testing and labeling].

GGG. Tank Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.


HHH. Exterior Coating: [Galvanized] [Manufacturer's standard enamel paint] [Primer paint] <Insert coating>.

2 06 INSULATED, STEEL, PRESSURE, POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS

III. [Available ]Manufacturers:

1. American Water Heater Company. 2. GSW Water Heating Company. 3. HESco Industries, Inc. 4. K-TAM Manufacturing, Inc. 5. Lochinvar Corp. 6. Precision Parts Corp. 7. PVI Industries, LLC. 8. RBI Water Heaters: A Mestek, Inc. Company. 9. Rheem Manufacturing Co.; Rheem Water Heater Div. 10. Smith, A. O. Water Products Co. 11. State Industries, Inc. 12. Teledyne Laars. 13. Wessels Co. 14. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

JJJ. Description: Steel, vertical, pressure-rated tank with cylindrical sidewalls.

KKK. Fabricate supports and attachments to tank with reinforcement strong enough to resist tank movement during seismic event when tank supports are anchored to building structure.

LLL. Construction: [ASME code, steel] [Steel], constructed with nontoxic welded joints, for [125-psig (860-kPa)] [150-psig (1035-kPa)] <Insert other> working pressure.




MMM. Manhole: Watertight, for tank more than [36 inches (915 mm)] <Insert dimension> in diameter; same pressure rating as tank.

NNN. Tappings: Factory-fabricated[ stainless] steel, welded to tank[ before testing and labeling].


OOO. Specialties and Accessories: Include tappings in tank and the following:


PPP. Vertical Tank Supports: Factory-fabricated steel legs or steel skirt, welded to tank[ before testing and labeling].

QQQ. Tank Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.


RRR. Insulation: Factory-installed, fiberglass or polyurethane foam; surrounding entire tank except connections and other openings; suitable for tank operating temperature; and complying with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

SSS. Jacket: Steel, with manufacturer's standard finish, unless otherwise indicated.

2 07 STEEL, GRAVITY, NONPRESSURE, POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS

TTT. Description: Steel, [horizontal] [vertical] nonpressure-rated tank with [cylindrical] [rectangular] sidewalls.

UUU. Fabricate supports and attachments to tank with reinforcement strong enough to resist tank movement during seismic event when tank supports are anchored to building structure.

VVV. Construction: Nonpressure rated, [factory] [factory or field] [field] fabricated from ASTM A 794 steel sheets, with nontoxic welded joints.

WWW. Reinforcement: ASTM A 36/A 36M, structural-steel shapes, welded to tank as required to maintain tank shape.

XXX. Manhole: Watertight, for tank more than [36 inches (915 mm)] <Insert dimension> [in diameter] [wide].

YYY. Tappings: Factory-fabricated[ stainless] steel, welded to tank.

1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: ASME B1.20.1, with female thread.




2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: ASME B16.5, flanged.

ZZZ. Specialties and Accessories: Include tappings in tank and the following:


AAAA. Horizontal Tank Supports: Factory-fabricated steel saddles or legs, welded to tank.

BBBB. Vertical Tank Supports: Factory-fabricated steel legs or steel skirt, welded to tank.

CCCC. Tank Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.


DDDD. Exterior Coating: [Galvanized] [Manufacturer's standard enamel paint] [Primer paint] <Insert coating>.

2 08 PLASTIC, PRESSURE, POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS

EEEE. [Available ]Manufacturers:

1. Park International Corp. 2. Structural North America. 3. Tankinetics, Inc. 4. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

FFFF. Description: FRP, vertical, pressure-rated tank with cylindrical sidewalls.

GGGG. Construction: [ASME code, composite FRP] [Composite FRP], [contact-molded] [contact-molded or filament-wound] [filament-wound], thermosetting-resin tank for [100-psig (690-kPa)] [125-psig (860-kPa)] [150-psig (1035-kPa)] <Insert other> working pressure.

1. Tank Lining Material: Nontoxic [HDPE] [LDPE] <Insert material> complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tanks.

HHHH. Manhole: Watertight, for tank more than [36 inches (915 mm)] <Insert dimension> in diameter; same pressure rating as tank.

IIII. Tappings: Factory-fabricated, reinforced FRP flanged-end nozzle.

1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Include plastic-to-steel transition fitting from tank nozzle flange to ASME B1.20.1, female thread.

2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: ASME B16.5, flanged.

JJJJ. Specialties and Accessories: Include tappings in tank and the following:

1. Pressure relief valve. 2. Pressure gage.




3. Thermometer.

KKKK. Vertical Tank Supports: Factory-fabricated steel legs or reinforced FRP skirt attached by FRP brackets to tank sidewall.

LLLL. Tank Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.

2 09 PLASTIC, NONPRESSURE, POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS

MMMM. FRP, Potable-Water Storage Tanks:


a. Associated Fiberglass Enterprises. b. Belding Tank Technologies, Inc. c. L. F. Manufacturing, Inc. d. Palmer Manufacturing & Tank, Inc. e. Raven Industries Inc.; Plastics Div. f. Viatec Inc. g. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

2. Description: FRP, vertical, nonpressure-rated water tank; complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tanks.

3. Construction: [ASTM D 3299, filament-wound] [ASTM D 3299, filament-wound or ASTM D 4097, contact-molded] [ASTM D 4097, contact-molded] FRP.

4. Tappings: Factory-fabricated, FRP flanged-end nozzle.

a. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Include plastic-to-steel transition fitting from tank nozzle flange to ASME B1.20.1, female thread.

1) [Exception: Tappings may be threaded FRP coupling integral with nozzle for connections for plastic piping.]

b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged.

5. Vertical Tank Support: Separate factory-fabricated steel stand, capable of supporting tank.

NNNN. PE, Potable-Water Storage Tanks:


a. Assmann Corporation of America. b. Chem-Tainer Industries. c. Nalge Nunc International. d. Poly Processing Company. e. Premier Plastics Ltd. f. Raven Industries Inc.; Plastics Div. g. Steel Tank and Fabricating Co., Inc. h. TolPlast Co., Inc. i. <Insert manufacturer's name.>




2. Description: PE, vertical, flat-bottom, nonpressure-rated water tank; complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tanks.

3. Construction: ASTM D 1998, molded PE. 4. Tappings: Factory-fabricated bulkhead fittings, attached to tank.

a. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: With female thread. b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged.

5. Vertical Tank Support: Separate factory-fabricated steel stand, capable of supporting entire bottom of tank.

OOOO. Manhole: Watertight, for tank more than [36 inches (915 mm)] <Insert dimension> in diameter.

PPPP. Cover for Open Tank: Plastic, same as or similar to tank material and with shape that encloses top of tank.

QQQQ. Specialties and Accessories: Include tappings in the tank and the following:


2 10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

RRRR. Test and inspect potable-water storage tanks according to the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Pressure Testing for ASME-Code, Potable-Water Storage Tanks: Hydrostatically test to ensure structural integrity and freedom from leaks. Fill tanks with water, vent air, pressurize to 1-1/2 times tank pressure rating, disconnect test equipment, hold pressure for 30 minutes with no drop in pressure, and check for leaks. Replace tanks that fail test with new tanks, and repeat until test is satisfactory.

2. Pressure Testing for Non-ASME-Code, Pressure, Potable-Water Storage Tanks: Hydrostatically test to ensure structural integrity and freedom from leaks at pressure of [50 psig (345 kPa)] <Insert measurement> above system operating pressure, but not less than [150 psig (1035 kPa)] <Insert measurement>. Fill tanks with water, vent air, pressurize tanks, disconnect test equipment, hold pressure for two hours with no drop in pressure, and check for leaks. Repair or replace tanks that fail test with new tanks and repeat until test is satisfactory.

3. Nonpressure Testing for Potable-Water Storage Tanks: Fill tanks to water operating level to ensure structural integrity and freedom from leaks. Hold water level for two hours with no drop in water level. Repair or replace tanks that fail test with new tanks, and repeat until test is satisfactory.




Part 3: EXECUTION

3 01 CONCRETE BASES

SSSS. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for tanks. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."


2. For supported tanks, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.


4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported tanks.

TTTT. Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in Division 3.

3 02 INSTALLATION

UUUU. Install water storage tanks on concrete bases, level and plumb, firmly anchored. Arrange so devices needing servicing are accessible.

1. Install horizontal tanks on [concrete piers and factory-fabricated] [fabricated steel supports and] saddles.

VVVV. Anchor tank supports and tanks to substrate.

1. Use steel or FRP straps over or around plastic tanks.

WWWW. Install tank seismic restraints.

XXXX. Install thermometers and pressure gages on water storage tanks and piping, if indicated. Thermometers and pressure gages are specified in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages."

YYYY. Install the following devices on tanks where indicated:

1. Pressure relief valves. 2. Temperature and pressure relief valves. 3. Vacuum relief valves. 4. Tank vents on nonpressure tanks. 5. Connections to accessories.

ZZZZ. After installing tanks with factory finish, inspect finishes and repair damages to finishes.

3 03 CONNECTIONS

AAAAA. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.




BBBBB. Install piping adjacent to potable-water storage tanks to allow service and maintenance.

CCCCC. Connect water piping to water storage tanks with unions or flanges and with shutoff valves. Connect tank drains with shutoff valves and discharge over closest floor drains.

1. General-duty valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."

a. Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Gate or ball. b. Valves NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Gate or butterfly. c. Drain Valves: NPS 3/4 (DN 20) gate or ball valve. Include outlet with, or nipple in

outlet with, ASME B1.20.7, 3/4-11.5NH thread for garden-hose service, threaded cap, and chain.

2. Water Piping Connections: Make connections to dissimilar metals with dielectric fittings. Dielectric fittings are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

3. Connect air piping to hydropneumatic tanks with unions or flanges and gate or ball valves. Make connections to dissimilar metals with dielectric fittings, which are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."


DDDDD. Perform the following final checks before filling:

1. Verify that air precharge in precharged tanks is correct. 2. Test operation of tank accessories and devices. 3. Verify that pressure relief valves have correct setting.

a. Manually operate pressure relief valves. b. Adjust pressure settings.

4. Verify that vacuum relief valves are correct size.

a. Manually operate vacuum relief valves. b. Adjust vacuum settings.

EEEEE. Filling Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written procedures. Fill tanks with water to operating level.

3 05 CLEANING

FFFFF. Clean and disinfect potable-water storage tanks.

GGGGG. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed, use procedure described in AWWA C652 or as described below:

1. Purge water storage tanks with potable water. 2. Disinfect tanks by one of the following methods:

a. Fill tanks with water-chlorine solution containing at least 50 ppm (50 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate tanks and allow to stand for 24 hours.




b. Fill tanks with water-chlorine solution containing at least 200 ppm (200 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate tanks and allow to stand for three hours.

3. Flush tanks, after required standing time, with clean, potable water until chlorine is not present in water coming from tank.

4. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination made by authorities having jurisdiction shows evidence of contamination.

HHHHH. Prepare written reports for purging and disinfecting activities.





Division (15) mechanical work

SECTION 15471

WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - General

1 01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1 02 SUMMARY

B. This Section includes the following types of water filtration equipment for water systems in buildings:

1. Bag-type filters. 2. Freestanding cartridge filters. 3. Off-floor cartridge filters. 4. Carbon filters. 5. Circulating sand filters. 6. Multimedia sand filters. 7. Greensand filters. 8. Separators.


1. Division 15 Section "Hydronic Piping" for hydronic piping strainers. 2. Division 15 Section "Steam and Condensate Piping" for steam piping system

strainers. 3. Division 15 Section "HVAC Water Treatment" for HVAC condenser water

filtration units and hot-water/chilled-water filtration units. 4. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for small cartridge-type water filters

for plumbing fixtures and for plumbing piping strainers.

1 03 DEFINITIONS

D. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

E. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.




F. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

G. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

H. PP: Polypropylene plastic.

I. ppm: Parts per million.

J. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

1 04 SUBMITTALS

K. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

L. Shop Drawings: Detail water filtration equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

M. Certificates of Shop Inspections and Data Reports: For products required to have ASME label, signed by product manufacturer.

N. Welding certificates.

O. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that water filtration equipment, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." Include the following:






P. Source quality-control test reports.

Q. Field quality-control test reports.




R. Startup service test reports.

S. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water filtration equipment to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


T. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of water filtration equipment through one source from a single manufacturer.

U. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of water filtration equipment and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."

V. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

W. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

X. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9," for all components that will be in contact with potable water.

1 06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

Y. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify [Architect] [Construction Manager] [Owner] no fewer than [two] <Insert number> days in advance of proposed interruption of water service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without [Architect's] [Construction Manager's] [Owner's] written permission.

Z. Feedwater Analysis:

1. Alkalinity: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 2. Arsenic: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 3. Calcium: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 4. Chlorine: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 5. Color: <Insert nephelometric turbidity units.> 6. Hydrogen-Ion Concentration: <Insert pH.> 7. Hardness: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 8. Hydrogen Sulfide: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 9. Iron: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 10. Lead: <Insert ppm (mg/L).>




11. Magnesium: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 12. Manganese: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 13. Potassium: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 14. Sand: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 15. Silt: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 16. Sodium: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 17. Total Dissolved Solids: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 18. Turbidity: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 19. <Insert characteristic>: <Insert value.>

AA. Feedwater Properties:

1. Inlet Water Pressure: <Insert psig (kPa).> 2. Water Temperature: <Insert deg F (deg C).>

1 07 COORDINATION

BB. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with Architectural and Structural Drawings.

1 08 EXTRA MATERIALS

CC. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Bag-Type Filter Bags: Bags for bag-type filters equal to [200] [400] <Insert number> percent of amount installed for each size and media indicated.

2. Cartridge-Filter Elements: Elements for cartridge filters equal to [200] [400] <Insert number> percent of amount installed for each size and media indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2 01 MANUFACTURERS







2 02 BAG-TYPE FILTERS

B. Single-Bag-Type Filters:


a. Cycron Corporation. b. Eden Equipment Co. c. Filter Specialists, Inc. d. Filtration Systems; div. of Mechanical Mfg. Corporation. e. Hayward Industrial Products, Inc. f. Krystal Klear Technologies, Inc.; a div. of Geyer's Mfr. & Design, Inc. g. Parker Hannifin Corporation; Process Filtration Div. h. PEP Filters, Inc. i. Rosedale Products, Inc. j. RPA Process Technologies. k. Shelco Filters; division of Tinny Corp. l. USFilter. m. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

2. Description: Simplex, floor-mounting housing with filter bag for removing suspended particles from water.

a. Housing: Corrosion resistant; designed to separate feedwater from filtrate and to direct feedwater through one bag-type water filter; with bag support and base, feet, or skirt.

1) Pipe Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded according to ASME B1.20.1.

2) Steel Housing Pipe Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Steel, Class 150 flanges according to ASME B16.5 or grooved according to AWWA C606. Provide stainless-steel flanges if housing is stainless steel.

3) Plastic Housing Pipe Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: 150-psig (1035-kPa) plastic flanges.

b. Bag: Replaceable; of shape to fit housing.

3. Capacity and Characteristics:

a. Filtrate Design Concentrations:

1) Alkalinity: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 2) Chlorine: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 3) Color: <Insert nephelometric turbidity units.> 4) Hydrogen Sulfide: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 5) Iron: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 6) Manganese: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 7) Sand: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 8) Silt: <Insert ppm (mg/L).>




9) Turbidity: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 10) <Insert characteristic>: <Insert value.>

b. Filter Design:

1) Continuous Flow: <Insert gpm (L/s).> 2) Peak Flow: <Insert gpm (L/s).> 3) Filtration Efficiency: [98] <Insert number> percent retention of

suspended particles [10] [20] <Insert size> micrometers and larger from feedwater of listed filtrate design concentrations.

4) Pressure Drop: Not to exceed [2 psig (14 kPa)] <Insert value> at filter design flow rate when clean[, and <Insert value> when dirty].

c. Housing:

1) Material: [Carbon steel with NSF 61 lining material] [Plastic] [Stainless steel].

2) Pressure Rating: <Insert psig (kPa).> 3) Seals: [NBR] <Insert material>. 4) Diameter: <Insert inches (mm).> 5) Height or Length: <Insert inches (mm).> 6) Inlet and Outlet Size: <Insert NPS (DN).> 7) Drain Size: [Not applicable] <Insert NPS (DN)>. 8) Bag Support: Top lock ring and perforated [stainless-steel] <Insert

material> basket.

d. Bag:

1) Nominal Diameter: <Insert inches (mm).> 2) Nominal Length: <Insert inches (mm).> 3) Media: [Cotton] [Polyester] [PP] <Insert material>; [felt, filament,

or mesh] [felt] [filament] [mesh] construction.

C. Multiple-Bag-Type Filters:


a. Filter Specialists, Inc. b. Hayward Industrial Products, Inc. c. Krystal Klear Technologies, Inc.; a div. of Geyer's Mfr. & Design, Inc. d. Parker Hannifin Corporation; Process Filtration Div. e. PEP Filters, Inc. f. Rosedale Products, Inc. g. RPA Process Technologies. h. Shelco Filters; division of Tinny Corp. i. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

2. Description: Simplex, floor-mounting housing with multiple filter bags for removing suspended particles from water.




a. Housing: Corrosion resistant; designed to separate feedwater from filtrate and to direct feedwater through bag-type water filters; with bag supports and base, feet, or skirt.


2) Steel Tank Pipe Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Steel, Class 150 flanges according to ASME B16.5 or grooved according to AWWA C606. Provide stainless-steel flanges if housing is stainless steel.


b. Bags: Replaceable; of shape to fit housing.



1) Alkalinity: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 2) Chlorine: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 3) Color: <Insert nephelometric turbidity units.> 4) Hydrogen Sulfide: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 5) Iron: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 6) Manganese: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 7) Sand: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 8) Silt: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 9) Turbidity: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 10) <Insert characteristic>: <Insert value.>

b. Filter Design:




c. Housing:

1) Material: [Carbon steel with NSF 61 lining material] [Plastic] [Stainless steel].

2) Pressure Rating: <Insert psig (kPa).> 3) Seals: [NBR] <Insert material>. 4) Diameter: <Insert inches (mm).> 5) Height or Length: <Insert inches (mm).> 6) Inlet and Outlet Size: <Insert NPS (DN).> 7) Drain Size: [Not applicable] <Insert NPS (DN)>.




8) Bag Support(s): Top lock rings and perforated [stainless-steel] <Insert material> basket(s).

d. Bags:

1) Number Required: <Insert number.> 2) Nominal Diameter: <Insert inches (mm).> 3) Nominal Length: <Insert inches (mm).> 4) Media: [Cotton] [Polyester] [PP] <Insert material>; [felt, filament,

or mesh] [felt] [filament] [mesh] construction.

2 03 CARTRIDGE FILTERS

D. Freestanding Cartridge Filters:


a. Campbell Manufacturing, Inc. b. Cycron Corporation. c. Diamond Water Conditioning. d. Eden Equipment Co. e. Filter Specialists, Inc. f. Filterspun; a div. of Service Filtration Corp. g. Filtrine Manufacturing Company; Drinking Water Division. h. Flowmatic Systems, Inc. i. Graver Technologies; Liquid Filter Products. j. Harmsco Filtration Products. k. Hydro Systems International. l. Keystone Filter Div.; Met-Pro Corporation. m. Krystal Klear Technologies, Inc.; a div. of Geyer's Mfr. & Design, Inc. n. Osmonics, Inc.; Hytrex Filters Div. o. Parker Hannifin Corporation; Process Filtration Div. p. PEP Filters, Inc. q. Rosedale Products, Inc. r. Serfilco, Ltd. s. Shelco Filters; division of Tinny Corp. t. USFilter. u. WET Products and Systems. v. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

2. Description: Simplex, floor-mounting housing with replaceable element(s) for removing suspended particles from water.

a. Housing: Corrosion resistant; designed to separate feedwater from filtrate and to direct feedwater through water filter element(s); with element support(s) and base, feet, or skirt.




1) Fabricate supports and base, feet, or skirt and attachment to housing with reinforcement strong enough to resist filter movement during a seismic event when filter base is anchored to building structure.


3) Steel Tank Pipe Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Steel, Class 150 flanges according to ASME B16.5 or grooved according to AWWA C606. Provide stainless-steel flanges if housing is stainless steel.


b. Element(s): Replaceable; of shape to fit housing.




b. Filter Design:


suspended particles [1] [10] [20] <Insert size> micrometers and larger from feedwater of listed filtrate design concentrations.


c. Housing:

1) Material: [Plastic] [Stainless steel] <Insert material>. 2) Pressure Rating: <Insert psig (kPa).> 3) Seals: [NBR] <Insert material>. 4) Diameter: <Insert inches (mm).> 5) Height or Length: <Insert inches (mm).> 6) Inlet and Outlet Size: <Insert NPS (DN).> 7) Drain Size: [Not applicable] <Insert NPS (DN)>.

d. Elements:




1) Number Required: [One] [Two] <Insert number>. 2) Nominal Diameter: <Insert inches (mm).> 3) Nominal Length: <Insert inches (mm).> 4) Media: [Activated charcoal] [Activated or ground charcoal]

[Ground charcoal] [Pleated polyester] [Pleated polyester or PP] [Pleated PP] [Wound polyester] [Wound polyester or PP] [Wound PP] <Insert material>.

E. Off-Floor Cartridge Filters:


a. Alamo Water Treatment. b. Campbell Manufacturing, Inc. c. Culligan International Company. d. Eagle Spring Filtration, Inc. e. Eden Equipment Co. f. Everpure, Inc. g. Fairey Industrial Ceramics Ltd. h. Filpro Corporation. i. Filterspun; a div. of Service Filtration Corp. j. Filtrine Manufacturing Company; Drinking Water Division. k. Flint & Walling, Inc.; Subsidiary of Zoeller Co. l. Flowmatic Systems, Inc. m. Graver Technologies; Liquid Filter Products. n. Harmsco Filtration Products. o. Hydro Systems International. p. Hydrotech, Inc. q. Keystone Filter Div.; Met-Pro Corporation. r. Matterhorn Filter Corporation. s. Omnipure Filter Company. t. Osmonics, Inc.; Hytrex Filters Div. u. Parker Hannifin Corporation; Process Filtration Div. v. Plymouth Products, Inc. w. Shelco Filters; division of Tinny Corp. x. Topway Global, Inc. y. USFilter. z. WET Products and Systems. aa. WaterSoft; a div. of AMTROL Inc. bb. Watts Premier. cc. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

2. Description: Simplex, [in-line] [wall-mounting] housing with replaceable element for removing suspended particles from water.

a. Housing: Corrosion resistant; designed to separate feedwater from filtrate and to direct feedwater through water filter element; with element support.

1) Pipe Connections: Threaded according to ASME B1.20.1. 2) Support: Wall bracket.




b. Element: Replaceable; of shape to fit housing.




b. Filter Design:


suspended particles [1] [10] [20] <Insert size> micrometers and larger from feedwater of listed filtrate design concentrations.


c. Housing:

1) Material: [PE or PP] [Plastic] [Stainless steel] <Insert material>. 2) Pressure Rating: <Insert psig (kPa).> 3) Seals: [NBR] <Insert material>. 4) Diameter: <Insert inches (mm).> 5) Height or Length: <Insert inches (mm).> 6) Inlet and Outlet Size: <Insert NPS (DN).> 7) Drain Size: [Not applicable] <Insert NPS (DN)>.

d. Element:

1) Nominal Diameter: <Insert inches (mm).> 2) Nominal Length: <Insert inches (mm).> 3) Media: [Activated charcoal] [Activated or ground charcoal]

[Ground charcoal] [Pleated polyester] [Pleated polyester or PP] [Pleated PP] [Wound polyester] [Wound polyester or PP] [Wound PP] <Insert material>.




2 04 CARBON FILTERS

F. Description: Simplex carbon filter, with media tank, media, and automatic backwash for [removing chlorine from] [and] [improving color, odor, and taste of] <Insert application> water.


a. Alamo Water Treatment. b. CSI; a division of Chandler Systems, Inc. c. Culligan International Company. d. CUNO Incorporated. e. Diamond Water Conditioning. f. EcoWater Systems, Inc. g. Environmental Dynamics Corporation. h. Marlo Incorporated. i. PEP Filters, Inc. j. RainSoft Div.; Aquion Partners L. P. k. Separmatic Fluid Systems. l. Springsoft International, Inc. m. USFilter. n. Water & Power Technologies, Inc. o. Water Right. p. WaterSoft; a div. of AMTROL Inc. q. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

2. Media Tank: Corrosion resistant with distribution system and media.

a. Construction:

1) Fabricate and label steel filter tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.

2) Fabricate and label FRP filter tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section X, if indicated.

3) Fabricate supports and base and attachment to tank with reinforcement strong enough to resist filter movement during a seismic event when filter base is anchored to building structure.


5) Steel Tank Pipe Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Steel, Class 150 flanges according to ASME B16.5 or grooved according to AWWA C606. Provide stainless-steel flanges if tank is stainless steel.

6) FRP Tank Pipe Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type A, integral; Designation [E, 125-psig (0.862-MPa)] [or] [F, 150-psig (1.034-MPa)]pressure category flanges of grade same as tank material according to ASTM D 5421.

7) Support: Base, feet, or skirt.




3. Controls: Automatic for control of backwash; factory wired for single, external electrical connection.

a. Panel: NEMA 250, Type [4] <Insert type> enclosure. b. Backwash Initiation Device: [Differential pressure gages] [Electric time

clock] [Water meter].



1) Alkalinity: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 2) Chlorine: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 3) Color: <Insert nephelometric turbidity units.> 4) Hydrogen-Ion Concentration: <Insert pH.> 5) Hydrogen Sulfide: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 6) Iron: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 7) Manganese: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 8) Total Dissolved Solids: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 9) Turbidity: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 10) <Insert characteristic>: <Insert value.>

b. Filter Design:

1) Continuous Flow: <Insert gpm (L/s).> 2) Flow Rate: <Insert gpm/sq. ft. (L/s per sq. m)> of media cross-

sectional area. 3) Peak Flow: <Insert gpm (L/s).> 4) Filtration Efficiency: [98] <Insert number> percent retention of



6) Backwash Flow: <Insert gpm (L/s).>

c. Filter Backwash Interval: <Insert psig (kPa)> pressure drop measured by differential pressure gages.

d. Filter Backwash Interval: <Insert number> days measured by time clock. e. Filter Backwash Interval: <Insert gal. (cu. m)> measured by water meter. f. Media Tank:

1) Material: [Carbon steel with NSF 61 lining material] [FRP] [Stainless steel].

2) Pressure Rating: <Insert psig (kPa).> 3) Media: [Activated charcoal] [Ground charcoal] <Insert material>. 4) Media Quantity: <Insert cu. ft. (cu. m).> 5) Diameter: <Insert inches (mm).> 6) Height: <Insert inches (mm).> 7) Inlet and Outlet Size: <Insert NPS (DN).>





1) Volts: [120] [240] [277] [480] <Insert value> V. 2) Phase: [Single] [Three]. 3) Hertz: [60] <Insert value> Hz. 4) Full-Load Amperes: <Insert value> A. 5) Minimum Circuit Ampacity: <Insert value> A. 6) Maximum Overcurrent Protection: <Insert value> A.

2 05 SAND FILTERS

G. Circulating Sand Filters:


a. Diamond Water Systems, Inc. b. Everfilt. c. Griswold Controls. d. LAKOS; a div. of Claude Laval Corporation. e. Miami Filter LLC. f. PEP Filters, Inc. g. Puroflux Corporation. h. United Industries, Inc. i. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

2. Description: Factory-fabricated and -tested, simplex, sand-filter system of filter tank, media, strainer, circulating pump, piping, and controls for removing sediment particles from water.

a. Filter Tank: Corrosion resistant with distribution system and media.

1) Construction:

a) Fabricate and label steel filter tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.

b) Fabricate and label FRP filter tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section X, if indicated.

c) Fabricate supports and base and attachment to tank with reinforcement strong enough to resist filter movement during a seismic event when filter base is anchored to building structure.


3) Steel Tank Pipe Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Steel, Class 150 flanges according to ASME B16.5 or grooved according to AWWA C606.

4) FRP Tank Pipe Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type A, integral; Designation [E, 125-psig (0.862-MPa)] [or] [F, 150-psig




(1.034-MPa)] pressure category flanges of grade same as tank material according to ASTM D 5421.

b. Strainer: Basket type.

1) Pipe Connections:

a) Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded according to ASME B1.20.1.

b) Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Cast-iron, Class 125 flanges according to ASME B16.1.

c. Piping: [Galvanized steel pipe, galvanized cast-iron fittings] [Stainless-steel pipe, stainless-steel fittings], and flanged, grooved, or threaded joints.

d. Piping: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) copper water tube, copper-alloy solder-joint fittings, and brazed, flanged, or grooved joints.

e. Safety Valves: Automatic and manual pressure relief. f. Circulating Pump: Overhung impeller, close coupled, single stage, end

suction, centrifugal. Comply with UL 778 and with HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3.

1) Pump Construction: Bronze fitted.

a) Casing: Radially split, cast iron. b) Pressure Rating: [125 psig (860 kPa)] [150 psig (1035 kPa)]

minimum. c) Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically

balanced, closed, and keyed to shaft. d) Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Steel shaft, with copper-alloy shaft

sleeve. e) Seal: Mechanical.

2) Motor: General requirements for motors are specified in Division 15 Section "Motors."

g. Controls: Automatic for control of circulating pump and tank backwash; factory wired for single, external electrical connection.

1) Panel: NEMA 250, Type [4] <Insert type> enclosure with time clock and pressure gages.

2) Pump: Automatic and manual. 3) Backwash: Automatic; with [time-clock] [differential-pressure-

switch] initiation device. 4) Backwash Valve: Tank mounted.

h. Support: Skid mounting.






1) Sand: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 2) Silt: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 3) <Insert characteristic>: <Insert value.>

b. Filter Design:

1) Continuous Flow: <Insert gpm (L/s)> at [5 psig (34.5 kPa)] <Insert value> pressure drop.

2) Flow Rate: <Insert gpm/sq. ft. (L/s per sq. m)> of media cross-sectional area.

3) Peak Flow: <Insert gpm (L/s).> 4) Filtration Efficiency: [98] <Insert number> percent removal of [1.8]

<Insert number> minimum, specific-gravity suspended particles [5] [10] [20] [45] <Insert size> micrometers and larger from feedwater of listed filtrate design concentrations.

c. Filter Tank: With internal distribution piping.

1) Material: [Carbon steel with NSF 61 lining material] [FRP] <Insert material>.

2) Pressure Rating: <Insert psig (kPa).> 3) Diameter: <Insert inches (mm).> 4) Height: <Insert inches (mm).> 5) Inlet and Outlet Size: <Insert NPS (DN).> 6) Purge Size: <Insert NPS (DN).>

d. Filter Media: [Graded silica sand] <Insert media>. e. Filter Backwash Interval: <Insert psig (kPa)> pressure drop measured by

differential pressure gages. f. Filter Backwash Interval: <Insert number> days measured by time clock. g. Circulating Pump:

1) Capacity: <Insert gpm (L/s).> 2) Total Dynamic Head: <Insert feet (kPa).> 3) Speed: <Insert rpm.> 4) Inlet Size: <Insert NPS (DN).> 5) Outlet Size: <Insert NPS (DN).>

h. Pump Motor Size and Characteristics:

1) Horsepower: <Insert value.> 2) Volts: [120] [208] [240] [277] [480] <Insert value> V. 3) Phase: [Single] [Three]. 4) Hertz: [60] <Insert value> Hz.

i. Unit Electrical Characteristics:

1) Full-Load Amperes: <Insert value> A. 2) Minimum Circuit Ampacity: <Insert value> A. 3) Maximum Overcurrent Protection: <Insert value> A.




H. Multimedia Sand Filters:


a. Alamo Water Treatment. b. Columbia Water Conditioning Systems, Inc. c. CSI; a division of Chandler Systems, Inc. d. Culligan International Company. e. CUNO Incorporated. f. Diamond Water Conditioning. g. Diamond Water Systems, Inc. h. Environmental Dynamics Corporation. i. Everfilt. j. Filtronics, Inc. k. Hungerford & Terry, Inc. l. Industrial Filter & Pump Mfg. Co. m. Ion Exchange Products, Inc. n. LAKOS; a div. of Claude Laval Corporation. o. Marlo Incorporated. p. Mer-Made Filter, Inc. q. Miami Filter LLC. r. PEP Filters, Inc. s. Puroflux Corporation. t. RainSoft Div.; Aquion Partners L. P. u. Separmatic Fluid Systems. v. Smith & Loveless, Inc. w. Springsoft International, Inc. x. USFilter/Whittier, Inc. y. Water & Power Technologies, Inc. z. Water King. aa. WaterSoft; a div. of AMTROL Inc. bb. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

2. Description: Factory-fabricated and -tested, [simplex] [duplex] [triplex], multimedia, sand-filter system of filter tank(s), media, piping, and controls for removing sediment particles from water.

a. Tank Construction:




b. Pipe Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded according to ASME B1.20.1.




c. Steel Tank Pipe Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Steel, Class 150 flanges according to ASME B16.5 or grooved according to AWWA C606.

d. FRP Tank Pipe Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type A, integral; Designation [E, 125-psig (0.862-MPa)] [or] [F, 150-psig (1.034-MPa)] pressure category flanges of grade same as tank material according to ASTM D 5421.

e. Service Valve(s): Diaphragm-type [hydraulically] [pneumatically] operated.

f. Piping: [Galvanized steel pipe, galvanized cast-iron fittings] [Stainless-steel pipe, stainless-steel fittings], and flanged, grooved, or threaded joints.

g. Piping: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) copper water tube, copper-alloy solder-joint fittings, and brazed, flanged, or grooved joints.

h. Piping: Schedule 80 ABS or PVC pipe and fittings with solvent-cemented joints.

i. Safety Valves: Automatic air vent. j. Controls for Simplex Tank System: Automatic, electric time clock for

control of filter system flow and backwash cycles; factory wired for single, external electrical connection.

k. Controls for [Duplex] [Triplex] Tank System: Automatic, electric time clock for control of filter system flow and backwash cycles; factory wired for single, external electrical connection. System operation shall be continuous with bypass piping and not more than one tank in backwash cycle at same time.

l. Support: Skid mounting.



1) Chlorine: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 2) Color: <Insert nephelometric turbidity units.> 3) Iron: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 4) Manganese: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 5) Total Dissolved Solids: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 6) Turbidity: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 7) <Insert characteristic>: <Insert value.>

b. Filter Design:

1) Continuous Flow: <Insert gpm (L/s)> at <Insert psig (kPa)> pressure drop.

2) Peak Flow: <Insert gpm (L/s)> at <Insert psig (kPa)> pressure drop.

3) Filtration Efficiency: [98] <Insert number> percent removal of suspended particles [10] [20] [40] <Insert size> micrometers and larger from feedwater of listed filtrate design concentrations.

4) Backwash Flow: <Insert gpm (L/s)> at <Insert psig (kPa)> pressure drop.




c. Media Tank: Single with controls. d. Media Tanks: [Two] [Three] with manifolded inlet, outlet, and drain piping

and controls. e. Each Media Tank:


2) Pressure Rating: <Insert psig (kPa)> minimum. 3) Distribution System: Factory-installed plastic. 4) Temperature Rating: <Insert deg F (deg C)> minimum. 5) Diameter: <Insert inches (mm).> 6) Height: <Insert inches (mm).> 7) Service Valve Size: <Insert NPS (DN).> 8) Inlet and Outlet Size: <Insert NPS (DN).> 9) Drain Size: <Insert NPS (DN).>

f. Filter Media: [Graded silica sand] <Insert media>.

I. Greensand Filters:


a. Alamo Water Treatment. b. CSI; a division of Chandler Systems, Inc. c. Culligan International Company. d. CUNO Incorporated. e. Diamond Water Conditioning. f. Environmental Dynamics Corporation. g. Filtronics, Inc. h. Hungerford & Terry, Inc. i. Ion Exchange Products, Inc. j. Marlo Incorporated. k. PEP Filters, Inc. l. RainSoft Div.; Aquion Partners L. P. m. Separmatic Fluid Systems. n. USFilter/Whittier, Inc. o. WaterSoft; a div. of AMTROL Inc. p. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

2. Description: Greensand-filter system of piping, and controls for removing [iron] [iron and manganese] [manganese] from water.

a. Tank Construction:







b. Pipe Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded according to ASME B1.20.1.

c. Steel Tank Pipe Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Steel, Class 150 flanges according to ASME B16.5 or grooved according to AWWA C606.

d. FRP Tank Pipe Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type A, integral; Designation [E, 125-psig (0.862-MPa)] [or] [F, 150-psig (1.034-MPa)] pressure category flanges of grade same as tank material according to ASTM D 5421.

e. Service Valve(s): Diaphragm-type [hydraulically] [pneumatically] operated.

f. Piping: [Galvanized steel pipe, galvanized cast-iron fittings] [Stainless-steel pipe, stainless-steel fittings], and flanged, grooved, or threaded joints.

g. Piping: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) copper water tube, copper-alloy solder-joint fittings, and brazed, flanged, or grooved joints.

h. Piping: Schedule 80 ABS or PVC pipe and fittings with solvent-cemented joints.

i. Safety Valves: Automatic air vent. j. Controls for Simplex Tank System: Automatic, electric time clock for

control of filter system flow and backwash cycles; factory wired for single, external electrical connection.

k. Controls for [Duplex] [Triplex] Tank System: Automatic, electric time clock for control of filter system flow and backwash cycles; factory wired for single, external electrical connection. System operation shall be continuous with bypass piping and not more than one tank in backwash cycle at same time.

l. Support: Skid mounting.



1) Iron: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 2) Manganese: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 3) <Insert characteristic>: <Insert value.>

b. Filter Design:

1) Continuous Flow: <Insert gpm (L/s)> at <Insert psig (kPa)> pressure drop.

2) Peak Flow: <Insert gpm (L/s)> at <Insert psig (kPa)> pressure drop.

3) Filtration Efficiency: [98] <Insert number> percent removal of suspended particles [10] [20] [40] <Insert size> micrometers and larger from feedwater of listed filtrate design concentrations.




4) Backwash Flow: <Insert gpm (L/s)> at <Insert psig (kPa)> pressure drop.

c. Media Tank: Single with controls. d. Media Tanks: [Two] [Three] with manifolded inlet, outlet, and drain piping

and controls. e. Each Media Tank:


2) Pressure Rating: <Insert psig (kPa)> minimum. 3) Distribution System: Factory-installed plastic. 4) Temperature Rating: <Insert deg F (deg C)> minimum. 5) Diameter: <Insert inches (mm).> 6) Height: <Insert inches (mm).> 7) Service Valve Size: <Insert NPS (DN).> 8) Inlet and Outlet Size: <Insert NPS (DN).> 9) Drain Size: <Insert NPS (DN).>

f. Filter Media: [Graded silica sand] <Insert media>.

2 06 SEPARATORS

J. Description: Simplex separator housing with baffles and chambers for removing sediment particles from water by centrifugal action and gravity.

K. Description: Factory-fabricated and -tested, simplex separator system of housing with baffles and chambers, strainer, circulating pump, piping, and controls for removing sediment particles from water by centrifugal action and gravity.


a. Alamo Water Treatment. b. Culligan International Company. c. Griswold Controls. d. LAKOS; a div. of Claude Laval Corporation. e. PEP Filters, Inc. f. Puroflux Corporation. g. Rosedale Products, Inc. h. USFilter/Whittier, Inc. i. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

2. Housing: With manufacturer's proprietary system of baffles and chambers.

a. Construction:

1) Fabricate and label steel separator housing to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.




2) Fabricate supports and base and attachment to separator housing with reinforcement strong enough to resist separator movement during a seismic event when separator base is anchored to building structure.

b. Inlet: Designed with tangential entry to produce centrifugal flow of feedwater.

c. Vortex Chamber: Designed for downward vortex flow and gravity separation of particles.

d. Collection Chamber: Designed to hold separated particles. e. Outlet: Near top of unit. f. Purge: At bottom of collection chamber. g. Pipe Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded according to

ASME B1.20.1. h. Pipe Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: ASME B16.1; steel,

Class 150 flanges according to ASME B16.5 or grooved according to AWWA C606. Provide stainless-steel flanges if tank is stainless steel.

3. Strainer: Basket type.

a. Pipe Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded according to ASME B1.20.1.

b. Pipe Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Cast-iron, Class 125 flanges according to ASME B16.1.

4. Piping: [Galvanized steel pipe, galvanized cast-iron fittings] [Stainless-steel pipe, stainless-steel fittings], and flanged, grooved, or threaded joints.

5. Piping: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) copper water tube, copper-alloy solder-joint fittings, and brazed, flanged, or grooved joints.

6. Safety Valves: Automatic and manual pressure relief. 7. Circulating Pump: Overhung impeller, close coupled, single stage, end suction,

centrifugal. Comply with UL 778 and with HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3.

a. Pump Construction: Bronze fitted.

1) Casing: Radially split, cast iron. 2) Pressure Rating: [125 psig (860 kPa)] [150 psig (1035 kPa)]

minimum. 3) Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically

balanced, closed, and keyed to shaft. 4) Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Steel shaft, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve. 5) Seal: Mechanical.

b. Motor: General requirements for motors are specified in Division 15 Section "Motors."

8. Controls: Automatic for control of circulating pump and separator purge; factory wired for single, external electrical connection.

a. Panel: NEMA 250, Type [4] <Insert type> enclosure.




b. Pump: Automatic and manual. c. Separator Purge: Automatic and manual.

9. Support: Skid mounting. 10. Capacity and Characteristics:


1) Sand: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 2) Silt: <Insert ppm (mg/L).> 3) <Insert characteristic>: <Insert value.>

b. Separator Design:

1) Continuous Flow: <Insert gpm (L/s)> at [5-psig (34.5-kPa)] <Insert value> pressure drop.

2) Peak Flow: <Insert gpm (L/s).> 3) Separator Efficiency: [98] <Insert number> percent removal of listed

[1.8] <Insert number> minimum, specific-gravity suspended particles [5] [10] [20] [45] <Insert size> micrometers and larger from feedwater of listed filtrate design concentrations.

c. Housing:

1) Material: [Carbon] [Stainless] steel. 2) Pressure Rating: <Insert psig (kPa).> 3) Diameter: <Insert inches (mm).> 4) Height: <Insert inches (mm).> 5) Inlet and Outlet Size: <Insert NPS (DN).> 6) Purge Size: <Insert NPS (DN).>

d. Circulating Pump:

1) Capacity: <Insert gpm (L/s).> 2) Total Dynamic Head: <Insert feet (kPa).> 3) Speed: <Insert rpm.> 4) Inlet Size: <Insert NPS (DN).> 5) Outlet Size: <Insert NPS (DN).>

e. Pump Motor Size and Characteristics:

1) Horsepower: <Insert value.> 2) Volts: [120] [208] [240] [277] [480] <Insert value> V. 3) Phase: [Single] [Three]. 4) Hertz: [60] <Insert value> Hz.

f. Unit Electrical Characteristics:

1) Full-Load Amperes: <Insert value> A. 2) Minimum Circuit Ampacity: <Insert value> A. 3) Maximum Overcurrent Protection: <Insert value> A.




2 07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

L. Hydrostatically test before shipment to minimum of one and one-half times pressure rating.

M. Prepare test reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3 01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of [filters] [and] [separators].

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.

C. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where [filters] [and] [separators] will be installed.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3 02 CONCRETE BASES

E. Anchor [filters] [and] [separators] to concrete bases.





5. Concrete base construction requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

6. Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in Division 3.

3 03 BAG-TYPE FILTER INSTALLATION

F. Install bag-type filters on concrete bases.




1. Exception: Omit concrete bases if installation directly on floor is indicated.

G. Install bag-type filters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.

1. Install filter media bags secured in filter housings.

H. Install seismic restraints for bag-type filter housings and anchor to building structure.

3 04 CARTRIDGE-FILTER INSTALLATION

I. Install cartridge filters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.

J. Install freestanding cartridge filters on concrete bases.

1. Exception: Omit concrete bases if installation directly on floor is indicated.

K. Attach wall brackets for off-floor, wall-mounting, cartridge filter to vertical surface. Attach housing(s), and base if any, to wall bracket.

L. Install housings for off-floor, in-line, cartridge filters in piping.

M. Install filter elements in cartridges.

N. Install seismic restraints for freestanding cartridge-filter housings and anchor to building structure.

3 05 CARBON-FILTER INSTALLATION

O. Install carbon filters on concrete bases, level and plumb.

1. Prepare carbon-filter tank distribution system and underbed, if any, for filter media and place specified media into tanks.

P. Install seismic restraints for carbon-filter housings and anchor to building structure.

3 06 SAND-FILTER INSTALLATION

Q. Install sand-filter tanks on concrete bases, level and plumb.

1. Prepare sand-filter tank distribution system and underbed for filter media and place specified sand and other media into tanks.




R. Install seismic restraints for sand-filter tanks and accessories and anchor to building structure.

3 07 SEPARATOR INSTALLATION

S. Install separators on concrete bases, level and plumb.

T. Install seismic restraints for separators and accessories and anchor to building structure.

3 08 CONNECTIONS

U. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

V. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

W. Make piping connections between water filtration equipment and dissimilar-metal water piping with dielectric fittings. Dielectric fittings are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

X. Install shutoff valves on feedwater-inlet and filtrate-outlet piping of each water filtration equipment [filter] [and] [separator] [, and on inlet and outlet headers].

1. Metal general-duty valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves." 2. Plastic valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping." 3. Exception: Water filtration equipment with factory-installed shutoff valves at

locations indicated.

Y. Install pressure gages on feedwater-inlet and filtrate-outlet piping of each water filtration equipment [filter] [and] [separator]. Pressure gages are specified in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages."

1. Exception: Water filtration equipment with factory-installed pressure gages at locations indicated.

2. Exception: Cartridge water filters.

Z. Install valved bypass water piping around each water filtration equipment [filter] [and] [separator].

1. Metal general-duty valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves." 2. Plastic valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping." 3. Water piping is specified in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping." 4. Exception: Bag-type water filtration equipment. 5. Exception: Cartridge water filtration equipment.

AA. Install drains as indirect wastes to spill into open drains or over floor drains.




BB. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

CC. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."


DD. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect[, test, and adjust] field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections[, and to assist in field testing]. Report results in writing.

EE. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.

3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

FF. Remove and replace water filtration equipment that does not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified above.

310 STARTUP SERVICE

GG. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service for [carbon-] [and] [sand-] filter water filtration equipment.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. <Insert startup steps if any.>

HH. Sample [filter] [and] [separator] filtrate after startup and at three consecutive seven-day intervals (total of four samples), and prepare certified test reports for required water performance characteristics.

311 DEMONSTRATION

II. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain [carbon-] [and] [sand-] filter water filtration equipment. Refer to Division 1 Section " Demonstration and Training."


division 15 mechanical ibs plumb

Documents

fighting section

definitions section

sprinklers section

general conditions section

mechanical work section

plumbing piping section

system accessories section

hydrant system section